WO2020063398A1 - Communication method and apparatus for indication information - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus for indication information Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020063398A1
WO2020063398A1 PCT/CN2019/106167 CN2019106167W WO2020063398A1 WO 2020063398 A1 WO2020063398 A1 WO 2020063398A1 CN 2019106167 W CN2019106167 W CN 2019106167W WO 2020063398 A1 WO2020063398 A1 WO 2020063398A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
type
activated
terminal device
parameter
network device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/106167
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
常俊仁
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020063398A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020063398A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0229Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a wanted signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a method and device for communicating instruction information.
  • DRX Discontinuous reception
  • LTE long term evolution
  • DRX technology allows terminal equipment to enter the dormant state at certain times in each DRX cycle and does not monitor the physical downlink shared channel (PDCCH); and enters the activation when the DRX cycle needs to be monitored at certain times Status to listen to the PDCCH. Therefore, the terminal device will not be in the state of monitoring the PDCCH all the time, and the purpose of saving the power consumption of the terminal device and improving the endurance can be achieved, so as to improve the user experience of the terminal device.
  • PDCCH physical downlink shared channel
  • NR new radio
  • the data communicated between terminal equipment and network equipment may be generated in bursts and completed in a short time.
  • NR also provides a mechanism for indicating information based on DRX (such as: wakeup signal (WUS) and go-to-sleep signal (GTS)) to further Save power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • WUS wakeup signal
  • GTS go-to-sleep signal
  • the terminal device If the terminal device does not receive the WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, it does not monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH during the DRX cycle. However, in the GTS mechanism, the terminal device receives the GTS corresponding to the DRX. Signal, it is in a sleep state in the DRX cycle and does not monitor the PDCCH or receive PDSCH; if the terminal device does not receive a WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, it is in an active state in the DRX cycle and monitors the PDCCH or receives PDSCH.
  • the terminal device with more services in the NR system is more suitable for the GTS mechanism. It is required that the terminal is always in the activated state. Only when the service ends, the GTS signal can be used for sleep.
  • the terminal device with fewer services is more suitable for the WUS mechanism and requires the terminal. The device is often in a sleep state and only wakes up through a WUS signal when it needs to process services.
  • only one of the WUS signal and the GTS signal can be used as a power saving application in all terminal devices of the NR system.
  • the NR system cannot dynamically determine more suitable indication information for different terminal devices.
  • the present application provides a method and device for indicating information communication, so as to send a switching command to a terminal device through a network device, so that the network device and the terminal device switch between different types of instruction information for communication, thereby satisfying different use scenarios of the terminal device And the dynamic change of services, improve the flexibility of switching the terminal's instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of terminal equipment.
  • a first aspect of the present application provides a method for communicating indication information, including: a terminal device receiving a handover command from a network device; wherein the handover command is used to switch a type of the indication information from a first type to a second type;
  • the terminal device monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
  • the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment can be used by a terminal device to generate and send to a network device a switching command for switching the type of instruction information from a first type to a second type, so that the terminal device determines according to the switching command After the second type of configuration information, the second type of indication information is monitored according to the second type of configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device can switch different instruction information for communication, thereby satisfying different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, improving the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reducing the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
  • the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
  • the method for communicating instruction information provided by this embodiment by combining the switching method of the instruction information type in the foregoing embodiment, and judging the use of more sleep signals and wake-up signals in the prior art, can realize two types of instruction information. Switch between each other.
  • the shortcoming of the prior art that the type of the indication information can only be fixed to one of GTS or WUS is relatively simple.
  • the terminal determining the second type of configuration information according to the handover command includes:
  • the monitoring, by the terminal device according to the configuration information of the second type, the indication information of the second type includes:
  • the terminal device monitors the second type of indication information on the at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
  • the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment when a terminal device processes different services on each CC or each BWP, the network device can deliver different services on different CCs or different BWPs according to a handover command and a mapping relationship. A command for instructing information switching, thereby enriching the application scenarios of the switching command and improving the instruction efficiency of the switching command.
  • the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter is mapped to at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP Relationship; the at least one parameter is used to indicate that the type of the indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP where the mapping relationship exists is switched from the first type to the second type;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and the plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
  • the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
  • the network device when a terminal device processes different services on each activated CC or each activated BWP, the network device can perform different activated CCs or Different services on different activated BWPs issue instructions to switch information. Specifically, at least one parameter included in the handover command and a mapping relationship between the at least one parameter and at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP, so that the terminal device can determine the activation corresponding to the received handover command according to the mapping relationship.
  • the switching of the indication information on the CC or the activated BWP further enriches the application scenarios of the handover command and improves the instruction efficiency of the handover command.
  • the method before the terminal device receives a handover command from a network device, the method further includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device satisfies a handover criterion, the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used for the network device Request to switch the type of the indication information.
  • the handover criterion includes:
  • the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold
  • the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  • the instruction information communication method can determine whether to switch the type of instruction information according to the service density between the two. If it is determined according to the judgment criteria that the type of instruction information needs to be judged, then The network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, so that the terminal device completes the switching of the instruction information type, so that when the switching condition of the indicated condition is met, according to the switching command sent by the network device to the terminal device, both the network device and the terminal device Use different instruction information for communication between them, so as to meet different usage scenarios of the terminal device, improve the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
  • the switching command includes: the second type of indication information
  • the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the indication information; then the terminal device determining the second type of configuration information according to the switching command includes: the terminal device according to the type switching command, the first A type of indication information and a handover relationship determine the second type of configuration information; wherein the handover relationship includes a conversion relationship between various types of the indication information.
  • the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment provides two different forms of handover commands, and the terminal device may instruct the terminal device to switch the type of the instruction information by using any of the handover commands.
  • the determining, by the terminal device, the second type of configuration information according to the switching command includes: if the terminal device determines that the terminal device monitors the first type Is different from the monitoring circuit used by the second type of instruction information, the terminal device switches the detection circuit for monitoring the first type of instruction information to monitor the second type of information. A monitoring circuit for instruction information; and / or, if the terminal device judges that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the monitoring location used by the second type of instruction information is different, the terminal device Switching the monitoring position of the first type of instruction information to the monitoring position of the second type of instruction information.
  • the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment may have different signal designs for different types of instruction information, which results in different detection circuits or receiving locations used by the terminal device when receiving different types of instruction information.
  • the terminal device configures the second type of configuration information, it is necessary to compare the first type of instruction information with the second type of instruction information. If the signal design of the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are the same, or the terminal device receives the same configuration information used by the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information, the terminal may be placed before The first type of configuration information used when monitoring the first type of instruction information is directly used as the second type of configuration information, and there is no need to change the existing configuration information of the terminal device. Conversely, if the terminal device determines that the signal design of the first type of indication information and the second type of indication information are different, it is necessary to change the configuration information of the related indication information.
  • the handover command is in the form of downlink control information DCI, MAC CE, or any one of the DCI, MAC CE, and radio resource control RRC signaling; or,
  • the switch command is carried in the system information.
  • the handover command provided in this embodiment is directed to that if terminal devices in the same cell use the same type of instruction information, the handover command is carried in the system information; and if terminal devices in the same cell use different types of instruction information ,
  • the downlink control information DCI, MAC CE, or any of the DCI, MAC CE, and radio resource control RRC signaling can be used to implement the handover command transmission, which improves the flexibility of the handover command.
  • the switching command further includes: a duration of the switching command
  • the monitoring of the second type of indication information by the terminal device according to the second type of configuration information includes: the terminal device monitoring the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information within the duration; The terminal device determines the first type of configuration information after the duration, and monitors the first type of indication information according to the first type of configuration information.
  • the method for switching the instruction information provided in this embodiment can enable the network device to instruct the terminal device to monitor and switch to the second type of instruction information within a certain period of time and resume monitoring of the first type before the switchover according to service requirements.
  • Instruction information improves the flexibility of instruction information switching and enriches application scenarios.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device receives a handover command from a network device, the terminal device further includes: the terminal device starts a timer of a preset time; the terminal device after the timer expires The terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the switching command.
  • the terminal device may not execute immediately after receiving the switching command according to the service arrival status of the terminal device, service delay requirements, or other policies of the terminal device, but may open a preset Time timer, the preset time here can be adjusted at any time to meet the needs of different businesses.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sending handover confirmation information to the network device;
  • the handover confirmation information is used to notify the network device that the terminal device has determined the second type of configuration information according to the handover command.
  • the method for switching instruction information provided in this embodiment can enable the terminal device to send confirmation information to the network device for confirmation after the terminal device has made the switching command effective and is ready to monitor the second type of instruction information, so that the network The device and the terminal device switch the type of the instruction information uniformly, which improves the fault tolerance when the instruction information is communicated.
  • a second aspect of the present application provides a method for communicating indication information, including: a network device generates a handover command; wherein the handover command is used to switch the type of the indication information from a first type to a second type;
  • the network device sends the handover command to the terminal device; so that the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the handover command, and monitors the second type of indication according to the second type of configuration information information.
  • the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
  • the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; the The at least one parameter is used to indicate that the type of the indication information on the at least one activated CC or the at least one activated BWP where the mapping relationship exists is switched from the first type to the second type;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP ;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and a plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
  • the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
  • the method before the network device generates a handover command, the method further includes: the network device receives a handover request from a terminal device; wherein the handover request is used by the terminal device to send the request to the network device.
  • the network device requests to switch the type of the indication information.
  • the generating a handover command by the network device includes: if the network device determines that a service density between the terminal device and the network device meets a handover criterion, the network device generates The switching command.
  • the handover criterion includes:
  • the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold
  • the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  • the generating, by the network device, a switching command includes: the network device determines that the type of instruction information of the terminal device can be switched, and the network device generates the switching command;
  • the network device may switch the type of the instruction information of the terminal device, including: when all types of instruction information are available to all terminal devices in a cell where the terminal device is located, the network device may A handover request to determine the type of instruction information of the terminal device; or, when all terminals in the cell where the terminal device is located need to use the same type of instruction information, the network device
  • the number of handover requests sent by the terminal device is greater than a preset threshold, and it is determined that the type of the indication information can be handed over.
  • the switching command includes: a second type of instruction information; or, the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the instruction information.
  • the form of the handover command is any one of downlink control information DCI, MAC CE, or bearer and DCI, MAC CE, radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the switching command is carried in system information.
  • the switching command further includes: a duration of the switching command.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device receives handover confirmation information from the terminal device; wherein the handover confirmation information is used to notify the network device that the terminal device has determined the second type of configuration information according to the handover command.
  • a third aspect of the present application provides a terminal device, where the terminal device is configured to execute the foregoing first aspect or the communication method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the terminal device may include a module for executing the communication method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • a fourth aspect of the present application provides a terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store instructions.
  • the processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory. Execution of the instructions causes the processor to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • a fifth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon a computer program that, when executed by a processor, implements the first aspect or a method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • a sixth aspect of the present application provides a network device, where the network device is configured to execute the foregoing second aspect or the communication method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the network device may include a module for executing the communication method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a seventh aspect of the present application provides a network device.
  • the network device includes a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is configured to store instructions.
  • the processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory, and Execution of the instructions causes the processor to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • An eighth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon a computer program that, when executed by a processor, implements the second aspect or a method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system applied to an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system applied to an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a DRX cycle in the prior art
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device according to the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device according to the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRM general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • WiMAX Global Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • the terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, Mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • access terminal user unit
  • user station mobile station
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote terminal
  • Mobile device user terminal
  • terminal wireless communication device
  • user agent user agent
  • the terminal device can be a station (ST) in WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, and personal digital processing (personal digital assistant, PDA) devices, handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, and next-generation communication systems, such as terminal devices in 5G networks or Terminal equipment in a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN) network.
  • ST station
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. They are the general name for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a device that is worn directly on the body or is integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Broad-spectrum wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, full or partial functions that do not rely on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on certain types of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical signs monitoring.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • the IoT is an important part of the development of future information technology. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. It is connected to the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and physical interconnection.
  • the IOT technology may implement, for example, narrow band NB technology, to achieve mass connection, deep coverage, and terminal power saving.
  • the NB includes only one resource block (RB), that is, the bandwidth of the NB is only 180 KB.
  • RB resource block
  • the terminals must be discrete in access. According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present application, the congestion problem of mass terminals of IOT technology when accessing the network through NB can be effectively solved.
  • the receiver of the data sent by the terminal device may be, for example, an access network device, where the access network device may be an access point (AP) in WLAN, GSM or CDMA Base station (BTS) can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, or a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or an evolved base station in LTE (evolved (NodeB, eNB, or eNodeB), or a relay station or access point, or an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, and an access network device in a future 5G network or an access network device in a future evolved PLMN network.
  • AP access point
  • BTS CDMA
  • NodeB, NB base station
  • gNB in a new radio
  • NR new radio
  • LTE evolved (NodeB, eNB, or eNodeB)
  • a relay station or access point or an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, and an access network device
  • an access network device provides services to a cell
  • a terminal device communicates with the access network device through a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource) used by the cell.
  • a transmission resource for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource
  • It may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a small cell.
  • the small cell here may include: a metro cell, a micro cell ( micro cells, pico cells, femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • multiple carriers on the carrier in the LTE system or 5G system can work on the same frequency at the same time.
  • the above carrier and cell concepts can be considered equivalent.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the concept of a carrier and a cell can be considered to be equal, for example, a UE accessing a carrier and accessing a cell are equivalent.
  • the receiver of the data sent by the terminal device may be, for example, an access network device, a core network device, etc., where the core network device may be connected to multiple access network devices for controlling access And can distribute the data received from the network side (for example, the Internet) to the access network device.
  • the network side for example, the Internet
  • terminal equipment The functions and specific implementations of the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network equipment listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and / or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and / or other machine-readable media used to store information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and / or carrying instruction (s) and / or data.
  • multiple application programs can be run at the application layer.
  • the application program that executes the communication method of the embodiment of the present application and the method for controlling the receiving end device to complete the received data The application of the corresponding action may be a different application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system applied to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 1 may include: at least one network device, such as network device 11, network device 12, and network device 13 in FIG. 1; the communication system may further include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal in FIG. Equipment 21.
  • the wireless communication system 100 can also support CoMP transmission, that is, multiple cells or multiple network devices can cooperate to participate in data transmission of a communication device or jointly receive data sent by a communication device, or multiple cells or multiple network devices can perform Cooperative scheduling or cooperative beamforming.
  • the multiple cells may belong to the same network device or different network devices, and may be selected according to channel gain or path loss, received signal strength, received signal instruction, and the like.
  • one of the network device 11 to network device 13 may be a serving network device, and the serving network device may refer to a communication device through a wireless air interface protocol.
  • Network equipment providing at least one of radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) connection, non-access stratum (NAS) mobility management, and security input services.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • security input services for example, the network device 12 and the network device 13 may be cooperative network devices.
  • the serving network device may send control signaling to the communication device, the cooperative network device may send data to the communication device; or, the serving network device may send control signaling to the communication device, and the serving network device and the cooperative network device may send data to the communication device; Alternatively, both the serving network device and the cooperative network device can send control signaling to the communication device, and both the serving network device and the cooperative network device can send data to the communication device; or, the cooperative network device can send control signaling to the communication device and service At least one of the network device and the cooperative network device may send data to the communication device; or, the cooperative network device may send control signaling and data to the communication device. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
  • FIG. 1 is only for easy understanding, and schematically illustrates the network device 11 to the network device 13 and the communication device, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application, and the wireless communication system may also include more or more A small number of network devices can also include a larger number of communication devices.
  • the network devices that communicate with different communication devices can be the same network device, or they can be different network devices, and network devices that communicate with different communication devices. The number may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device 11 and the communication device 21 are taken as examples to briefly explain the communication between the network device and the communication device.
  • the network device 11 may include one antenna or multiple antennas.
  • the network device 11 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art may understand that each of them may include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (for example, a processor, a modulator, and a multiplexer). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
  • the network device 11 can communicate with a plurality of communication devices.
  • the communication device 21 may be, for example, a cellular phone, a smart phone, a portable computer, a handheld communication device, a handheld computing device, a satellite radio, a global positioning system, a PDA, and / or any other device for communicating on the communication system shown in FIG. 1. Suitable for equipment.
  • the communication device 21 communicates with a network device 11, where the network device 11 sends information to the communication device 21 through a forward link (also referred to as a downlink), and through a reverse link (also referred to as a Uplink)
  • the network device 11 receives information from the communication device 21.
  • the forward link and the reverse link use different frequency bands.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • the forward link and the reverse link may use a common frequency band.
  • Each antenna (or antenna group consisting of multiple antennas) and / or area designed for communication is called a sector of the network device 11.
  • the antenna group may be designed to communicate with a communication device in a sector covered by the network device 11.
  • the network device 11 may send signals to all communication devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity.
  • the transmitting antenna of the network device 11 can also use beamforming to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the forward link.
  • the phase Mobile devices in neighboring cells experience less interference.
  • the network device 11 and the communication device 21 may be a wireless communication transmitting apparatus and / or a wireless communication receiving apparatus.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may encode the data for transmission.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may obtain (for example, generate, receive from another communication device, or save in a memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted to the wireless communication receiving device through a channel.
  • Such data bits may be contained in a transport block (or transport blocks) of data, which may be segmented to generate multiple code blocks.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 1 may be a PLMN network, a D2D network, an M2M network, an IoT network, or other networks.
  • FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example.
  • the network may also include other network devices or communication devices. Not drawn.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a DRX cycle in the prior art.
  • discontinuous reception is a technology used to reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment in long-term evolution (LTE) communications.
  • the network equipment is in the connected state and idle state.
  • inactive terminal equipment is configured with DRX function.
  • the terminal device for a terminal device configured with a DRX function, in each DRX cycle, the terminal device is in an activated state (On-Duration) at the previous part of each DRX cycle, and monitors the physical downlink shared channel. (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH); and the sleep time after the DRX cycle activation time enters the sleep state, and no PDCCH monitoring is performed.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the network device will ensure that the PDCCH is sent to the terminal device at the activation time in the DRX cycle of the terminal device.
  • DRX technology in LTE.
  • the DRX function control entity is located at the MAC layer of the protocol stack. Its main function is to control the sending of instructions to the physical layer to notify the physical layer that listening to the PDCCH at a specific time is in the active period, and the reception will not be turned on for the rest of the time.
  • Antenna, terminal equipment is in sleep state. As a result, the terminal device will not be in the state of monitoring the PDCCH all the time, and the purpose of saving power consumption and improving battery life of the terminal device is achieved, thereby improving the user experience of the terminal device.
  • NR new radio
  • NR may provide additional indication information on the basis of DRX (It should be noted that all the indication information in this application can also be referred to as a terminal power saving signal (UE power saving signal signal, UPSS), the two are the same) mechanism
  • UE power saving signal signal UPSS
  • UPSS terminal power saving signal
  • the terminal device needs to determine whether the terminal executes the DRX mechanism in each DRX cycle according to the acquired instruction information, that is, whether to activate the DRX cycle corresponding to the instruction information according to the instruction information It is in an active state and monitors the PDCCH or receives a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
  • UE power saving signal signal UPSS
  • a wake-up signal WUS
  • GTS go-to-sleep signal
  • the indication information is WUS
  • the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal monitors the PDCCH, or the terminal is monitored to monitor the PDCCH; or, the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal receives the PDSCH, or instruct the terminal to receive the PDSCH.
  • the WUS mechanism if a terminal device receives a WUS signal corresponding to a DRX cycle, it is activated in the DRX cycle and monitors the PDCCH or receives a PDSCH; if the terminal device does not receive a WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, Do not listen to the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH in the sleep state during the DRX cycle.
  • the indication information may be sent before the activation time of the corresponding DRX cycle or during the activation time of the corresponding DRX cycle.
  • the indication information is sent before the DRX cycle; for the terminal device in the RRC connected state, And for the terminal device configured with the DRX function, the indication information can be sent before the DRX cycle or during the activation time of the DRX cycle.
  • the network device sends the instruction information to the terminal device, it does not send the instruction information to the terminal device every DRX cycle, but decides whether to send the instruction information according to the policies such as the service arrival situation and service delay requirements.
  • the terminal device detects the indication information sent by the network device to other terminal devices in advance of the DRX time indicated by the network device, and then the terminal device can distinguish the instruction information of different terminal devices in a code division manner.
  • the terminal device when receiving the instruction information, the terminal device only needs to enable a part of the receiving circuit corresponding to the instruction information in the terminal device, and the monitoring time is short.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the application of WUS in the prior art, where the instruction information is WUS and the instruction information is sent before the DRX cycle of the DRX cycle as an example for illustration.
  • the time difference between the activation time of the DRX cycle and the reception of the WUS instruction information It is recorded as GAP in advance.
  • the network device and terminal device are configured in advance at a specific GAP in advance, the network device sends instruction information to the terminal device in the advance time of the DRX cycle, and the terminal device receives the instruction sent by the terminal device in the advance time of the DRX cycle. information.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the application of WUS in the prior art, where the instruction information is WUS and the instruction information is sent before the DRX cycle of the DRX cycle as an example for illustration.
  • the time difference between the activation time of the DRX cycle and the reception of the WUS instruction information It is recorded as GAP in advance.
  • the network device and terminal device are configured in advance at a
  • a network device determines that a terminal device has a PDCCH or a PDSCH scheduled by the terminal device or multiple terminal devices in the DRX cycle 1
  • a WUS instruction is sent to the terminal device in advance of the DRX cycle 1 to wake up the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After receiving the WUS, the terminal device is in the active state within the DRX cycle 1 corresponding to the WUS and is monitoring the PDCCH or PDSCH.
  • the WUS is not sent to the terminal device in advance before the DRX cycle 2, and the terminal device is in the DRX cycle 2 If no WUS has been received before, the terminal device is in the sleep state for the entire period of the DRX cycle 2. It should be noted that the heights of the various signals as shown in FIG. 3 are only used to characterize the relative currents or power levels monitored by the various signals.
  • the indication information is GTS
  • the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal monitors the PDCCH or the terminal does not monitor the PDCCH; or the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal receives the PDSCH or the terminal does not receive the PDSCH.
  • the GTS mechanism if a terminal device receives a GTS signal corresponding to a DRX, it does not listen to the PDCCH or receive a PDSCH during the DRX cycle; if the terminal device does not receive a WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, Then it is in the active state in this DRX cycle and monitors the PDCCH or receives the PDSCH.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the application of GTS in the prior art, and the same description is given by using an example in which the indication information is sent before the DRX cycle of the DRX cycle, where the indication information is GTS.
  • the time difference between the activation time of the DRX cycle and the reception of the GTS indication information is recorded as the GAP in advance.
  • the network equipment and the terminal equipment are configured in advance with a specific GAP in advance, the network equipment sends instruction information to the terminal equipment in the advance time of the DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device receives the indication information sent by the terminal device in advance of the DRX cycle. As shown in FIG.
  • the GTS sends the GTS to the terminal device in advance before the DRX cycle 3.
  • the terminal device is in a sleep state for the entire period of the DRX cycle 3 corresponding to the GTS.
  • the network device determines that the terminal device has a PDCCH or PDSCH scheduled by the terminal device or multiple terminal devices during the DRX cycle 4, the GTS is not sent to the terminal device in advance before the DRX cycle 4, and the terminal device is before the DRX cycle 4 If the GTS is not received, the activation time of the terminal device during the DRX cycle 4 is in the active state and the PDCCH or PDSCH is monitored. It should be noted that the heights of various signals as shown in FIG. 4 are also only used to characterize the relative current or power magnitude of various signal monitoring.
  • the use of instruction information such as WUS and GTS can enable network devices to determine the existence of PDCCH or PDSCH of one or more terminal devices within the activation time of a certain DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device wakes up during the activation time in the DRX cycle, and keeps the terminal device active to monitor the PDCCH or receive PDSCH within the activation time, otherwise the terminal device is always in a sleep state even during the entire DRX cycle, and therefore in a certain period
  • the power consumption of the terminal equipment is saved to a certain extent.
  • the terminal device uses the instruction information, it can only be used in WUS or GTS.
  • the network device only configures one of the WUS mechanism or the GTS mechanism for the terminal device, and for each terminal There is no clear basis for judging which kind of indication information is specifically configured.
  • the network device needs to send the instruction information WUS to the corresponding terminal device before each DRX cycle that needs to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH, so that the corresponding terminal device processes the instruction information and The activation time of the DRX cycle is active.
  • the terminal device needs to receive and process an additional WUS instruction message before each DRX cycle. This not only does not save the power consumption of the terminal device, but also provides frequent instructions. The reception and processing of information increases the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the network device will only send an instruction GTS to the terminal device before it needs to monitor the PDCCH and receive the DRX cycle of the PDSCH.
  • the terminal device configured with the GTS mechanism is infrequent, each The terminal device in the sleep mode before the DRX cycle also needs to receive and process a GTS indication message, and similarly, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved to a limited extent. Therefore, how to overcome the aforementioned problems in the current application of power-saving signals is a technical problem to be solved urgently at present.
  • the present application provides a communication method of indication information, so that when a switching condition of the indication information is satisfied, the network device sends a switching command to the terminal device. After the terminal device makes the switching command effective, both the network device and the terminal device Another type of indication information is used between them to meet different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 can be executed in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method for communicating instruction information shown in FIG. 5 includes:
  • S101 The network device generates a switching command, where the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type.
  • the network device when the network device determines that the type of the indication information of the terminal device is switched from the first type to the second type, it generates a switching command for instructing the type of the indication information of the terminal device to be switched from the first type to The second type.
  • the type of the instruction information used by the terminal device before S101 is the first type, that is, the terminal device determines whether to perform the monitoring step according to monitoring the first type of instruction information.
  • a network device After a network device determines that the type of instruction information of a terminal device needs to be switched, a network device generates a switch command and sends it to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device to switch the type of instruction information, so that the terminal device changes the type of instruction information from the first
  • the type is switched to the second type, and whether to perform the monitoring step is determined according to the instruction information of the second type.
  • the monitoring step described in this embodiment may be: the terminal device determines whether to monitor the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, or monitors the PDCCH, or does not monitor the PDCCH according to whether the terminal device receives the instruction information from the network device; or determines whether to receive the physical downlink sharing Channel PDSCH, or receive PDSCH, or not receive PDSCH.
  • the types of the indication information in this embodiment include at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS, and the first type is different from the second type. Then further optionally, if the first type of indication information is GTS, the second type of indication information is WUS; if the first type of indication information is WUS, the second type of indication information is GTS.
  • a possible representation form of the handover command generated by the network device in this embodiment is that the handover command is used to represent a certain type of indication information, or the handover command is used to represent a certain type by using one or more parameters carried by the handover command.
  • a type of instruction information for example, a specific bit in a switching command is specified to indicate the type of the instruction information.
  • the switching command is used to instruct the type of the instruction information to be switched Is the first type; or when the bit of the switching command is "1", the switching command is used to instruct to switch the type of the indication information to the second type.
  • the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type, and then the value of the specific bit of the switching command is "1".
  • the handover command generated by the network device in this embodiment is that the handover command includes a type switching instruction of the instruction information, but does not include the type of the instruction information. That is, the network device only uses the switch command to inform the terminal device whether the type of instruction information needs to be switched. When the type of instruction information needs to be switched, the terminal device determines the type of the instruction information from the first type to the second. Types of. For example, when the switching command is "1", it is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the type of instruction information, and when the switching command is "0", it is used to instruct the terminal device not to switch the type of instruction information.
  • the terminal device performs the switching of the specific instruction information.
  • the terminal device specifically determines the second type of indication information of the handover according to the handover command, which will be described in S103 in the subsequent embodiment of the present application.
  • S102 The network device sends a handover command to the terminal device; then the terminal device receives the handover command from the network device.
  • the network device sends the handover command generated in S101 to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device receives the handover command sent from the network device.
  • the network device may send the handover command to the terminal device in the following form: downlink control information (DCI), MAC CE, or carried in DCI, MAC CE, radio resource control (RRC) In signaling or in system information.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • MAC CE or carried in DCI
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the types of instruction information used by all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located are the same, if the type of instruction information of one terminal device in the cell is switched, the types of instruction information of other terminal devices in the cell need to be correspondingly changed. Switch.
  • the network device sends a handover command to the terminal device, one possible way is to bear the handover command in the system information to broadcast to all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located.
  • all the terminal devices in the cell receive the After the system information, all terminal devices switch the type of instruction information according to the switch command carried in the system information.
  • the system information here may be any existing system information or new system information communicated between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the switching command may be carried by one or more specific bits or idle bits in the system information.
  • the switch command is used to indicate that when the type of the terminal device is switched, the corresponding bit value is "1" or the corresponding multiple bit values are "10".
  • the switch command is used for the indication information of the terminal device, When the type does not need to be switched, the corresponding one bit value is "0" or the corresponding multiple bit values are "01"; for example, the switching command may also indicate the terminal device's indication information through multiple bits.
  • the handover command sent by the network device to the terminal device can be through a specially set physical layer signal or an existing physical
  • the layer signal DCI, a specially set or existing MAC CE indicates the handover command, or the handover command is carried in a specific bit in the existing or new DCI, MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • the handover command may be carried by one or more specific bits in the MAC CE.
  • the handover command is used to indicate the type of instruction information of the terminal when the bit value in the MAC CE is "1", and the handover command is used to indicate that the type of instruction information of the terminal does not need to be switched In MAC CE, the value of this bit is "0".
  • the switch command can indicate the type of the switching information of the terminal device through multiple specific bits. If the terminal device can be configured with four types of indicating information, the switching is The command can instruct the terminal device to switch to the corresponding type of instruction information through "00", “01”, “10”, and "11", respectively.
  • S103 The terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the switching command.
  • the terminal device processes the handover command received in S102, and the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the handover command.
  • the terminal device determines whether to perform the monitoring step by monitoring the first type of instruction information, and the switching command received in S102 is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the type of the instruction information, and it is switched to monitoring the second type of instruction The information determines whether to perform the monitoring step. Therefore, S103 can be understood as that the terminal device takes effect the switch command from the network device, that is, the terminal device configures the monitoring of the second type of instruction information to implement the instruction information switching, or more specifically Monitor the first type of configuration information to modify / switch to the second type of configuration information.
  • the terminal device may configure / store different configuration information corresponding to different types of indication information in advance.
  • the terminal device may directly select and execute the configured corresponding type of configuration according to the type indicated by the switching command. Information or obtain corresponding configuration information stored in the storage space and perform configuration.
  • determining the second type of configuration information in this embodiment includes at least the following steps: If the terminal device determines that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the monitoring circuit used by the second type of instruction information is different, the terminal device Switching the detection circuit for monitoring the first type of instruction information to a monitoring circuit for monitoring the second type of instruction information; and / or, if the terminal device determines that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information The monitoring locations used by the instruction information are different, and the terminal device switches the monitoring location of the first type of instruction information to the monitoring location of the second type of instruction information.
  • the terminal device is configured with the second type.
  • the first type of instruction information needs to be compared with the second type of instruction information. If the signal design of the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are the same, or the terminal device receives the same configuration information used by the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information, the terminal may be placed before The first type of configuration information used when monitoring the first type of instruction information is directly used as the second type of configuration information, and there is no need to change the existing configuration information of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines that the signal design of the first type of indication information and the second type of indication information are different, it is necessary to change the configuration information of the related indication information.
  • the monitoring circuit used for monitoring the first type of instruction information is different from the monitoring circuit used for monitoring the second type of instruction information, it is necessary to adjust the monitoring circuit of the terminal device to the second type in this step. Instructions for the monitoring circuit used. If the receiving location of the terminal device for receiving the first type of instruction information is different from the receiving location of the second type of instruction information, in this step, it is necessary to adjust the receiving location of the terminal device's instruction information to the second type of instruction. Where the message was received.
  • the receiving location here may be a time domain location, a frequency domain location, or a time-frequency location where the terminal device receives the indication information.
  • the configuration information of the first type of instruction information may also be changed to the configuration information of the second type of instruction information.
  • the information may also be a scrambling mode of the indication information or an encryption and decryption mode of the indication information.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device starts a timer for a preset time; and executes S103 after the timer expires.
  • the terminal device may not execute immediately after receiving the handover command according to the service arrival situation of the terminal device, service delay requirements, or other policies of the terminal device, but may start a timer of a preset time, the preset here The time can be adjusted by terminal equipment or network equipment according to business needs to meet the needs of different services.
  • the terminal device performs the configuration of the second type of configuration information in S103 again.
  • the terminal device Before the timer expires, the terminal device still maintains the first type of configuration information of the first type of instruction information before receiving the handover command, and determines whether to perform the monitoring step by using the first type of instruction information; Determine the second type of configuration information, and use the second type of indication information to determine whether to perform the monitoring step.
  • the terminal device in S103 also needs to first perform After determining the second type of indication information to be switched, then determine the configuration information corresponding to the second type of indication information.
  • one possible processing method of this type of switching command is that if the terminal device is configured with only two types of instruction information, once the terminal receives the switching command, it switches the currently configured instruction information to Another type. For example, taking GTS and WUS as examples, the terminal device monitors the GTS to determine whether to perform the monitoring step, and after receiving the switch command, the terminal device determines to switch the type of the instruction information from GTS to WUS, and then determines the corresponding type of the instruction information WUS Configuration information and determine whether to perform the listening step through WUS.
  • the switching relationship includes a conversion relationship between various types of indication information.
  • the switching relationship can be configured in advance by the terminal device and stored in the storage device of the terminal device; or the switching relationship can also be carried in the switching command and sent by the network device to the terminal device in real time.
  • Such a switching relationship can also be controlled by the network device according to the service situation Adjust switching relationships in real time. It is assumed that the terminal device can monitor three types of indication information A, B, and C. Therefore, the switching relationship of the terminal device includes three conversion relationships: AB, BC, and CA.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device receives the switching command, it needs to Switch the type of instruction. For example, the terminal device determines whether to perform the monitoring step by monitoring type A instruction information. After the terminal device receives the switching command, the terminal device jointly determines that the type of the instruction information needs to be switched from type A to B according to the switching command, the type A of the monitoring information currently being monitored, and the conversion relationship of "AB" in the switching relationship. Type, that is, determining that the second type of configuration information is type B configuration information corresponding to type B instruction information. After the switching command takes effect, it is determined whether to perform the monitoring step by monitoring type B instruction information. It should be noted that the switching relationship here is only an example, and the switching relationship may further include more types of conversion relationships such as A-C, B-C, and C-A, which are not limited herein.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends handover confirmation information to the network device; wherein the handover confirmation information is used to notify the network device that the terminal device has performed the second type of configuration information determined in S103, that is, The terminal device has enabled the handover command and configured the second type of configuration information, and has been able to perform monitoring the second type of instruction information. Therefore, after the terminal device has made the switching command effective through S103, the terminal device can send confirmation information to the network device for confirmation, so that both the network device and the terminal device confirm that the type of the instruction information is switched.
  • the network device has already sent the terminal to the terminal.
  • the device sends the second type of indication information.
  • S104 The terminal device monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
  • monitoring the second type of indication information includes: determining whether to perform the monitoring step according to whether the second type of indication information is received.
  • the terminal device completes switching the type of the instruction information according to the switching command, and the terminal device changes from monitoring the first type of instruction information to monitoring the second type of instruction information before receiving the switching command.
  • the monitoring step is: the terminal determines whether to monitor the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, or monitors the PDCCH, or does not monitor the PDCCH according to whether the terminal receives the second type of indication information from the network device; or determines whether to receive the PDCCH
  • the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH either receives the PDSCH or does not receive the PDSCH.
  • the switching command sent by the network device to the terminal device further includes a duration of the switching command. That is, after receiving the switching command and executing S103, the terminal device executes the monitoring of the second type of instruction information according to the second type of configuration information in S104 within the duration; and after the duration, the terminal device determines and configures the first A type of configuration information, and monitoring the first type of indication information according to the first type of configuration information. Therefore, the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch to monitoring the second type of instruction information within a certain time according to the service requirements. After this period of time, the terminal device resumes monitoring the first type of instruction information before receiving the switching command, which improves the flexibility of the instruction information switching and enriches the application scenario.
  • a switching command generated by a network device and sent to a terminal device is used to switch the type of instruction information from a first type to a second type, so that the terminal device After receiving the switching command, the second type of configuration information is determined according to the switching command, and the second type of indication information is monitored according to the second type of configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device can switch different instruction information for communication, thereby satisfying different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, improving the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reducing the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
  • the communication scenario of the terminal device is not limited, and the instruction command sent by the network device to the terminal device does not limit the processing of a certain communication or a certain communication type of the terminal device. That is, after the terminal device receives the switching command, it applies the switching of the type of instruction information indicated by the switching command to all possible communication scenarios of the terminal device.
  • a terminal device in a carrier aggregation (CA) communication scenario, a terminal device has multiple component carriers (CCs) with instructions that need to be monitored, or the terminal device has one or more bandwidths on its carrier.
  • CCs component carriers
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • one or more BWPs also have indication information that needs to be monitored.
  • the terminal device applies the switching of the indication information type to all activated CCs or all activated BWPs of the terminal device.
  • a handover has achieved the purpose of switching the type of the instruction information
  • the network device cannot perform the switching on different CCs or different BWPs according to the handover command.
  • Different services give instructions for switching the type of instruction information, and cannot accurately switch the type of instruction information for one or some activated CCs or activated BWPs.
  • this application also provides a method for communicating information of instructions, so that the terminal device can perform handover according to the network device.
  • the command determines the type of indication information to switch on a specific CC or a specific BWP.
  • the steps performed by the terminal device in S103 provided in this embodiment are: the terminal device determines at least one activated CC or a second type indication on at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship. Information and its configuration information; the step performed by the terminal device in S104 is: the terminal device monitors the second type of indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
  • the switching command provided in this embodiment includes: at least one parameter.
  • At least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; at least one parameter is used to indicate that there is a mapping relationship between at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP.
  • the type of indication information is from The first type is switched to the second type.
  • mapping relationship here can be configured in advance by the network device in the terminal device, and the terminal device can be used when needed.
  • the mapping relationship may also be carried in a handover command.
  • the parameters included in the handover command described in the embodiments of the present application may be a command or information represented by at least one bit, and each parameter may be regarded as the parameter independently.
  • Corresponding activated CC or activated BWP switching command indicating the type of information.
  • the following describes the embodiment according to the method of switching the indication information type in four different application scenarios of the terminal device.
  • the first application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a non-CA, there is only one communication carrier and there is only one activated BWP on the carrier.
  • the switch command at this time may include: a parameter.
  • the terminal device determines the type of the instruction information for switching the activated BWP according to the switching command. Assuming that the activated BWP originally monitors the first type of indication information, the terminal device needs to determine the second type of configuration information on the activated BWP according to the switching command, and then use the second type of configuration information on the activated BWP. Monitor the second type of instruction.
  • the implementation process of this embodiment is the same as the process shown in FIG. 5, and the implementation method and principle are the same as those in FIG. 5, and details are not described again.
  • the second application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a non-CA, there is only one communication carrier and there are multiple activated BWPs on the carrier.
  • the switching command at this time may include: at least one parameter; the mapping relationship includes: when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, a one-to-one correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs; or, at least one parameter is one When there are multiple parameters, the corresponding relationship between each parameter in at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs; or when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, the parameter combination of multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated BWP.
  • the switching command received by the terminal device from one activated BWP can be realized, and the type of instruction information on other activated BWPs can be switched.
  • the mapping relationship of this embodiment includes three possible implementation modes: 1, when at least one parameter is multiple parameters, each parameter of the multiple parameters corresponds to an activated BWP, and the two are in a one-to-one relationship.
  • the switch command can include 3 parameters. It is assumed that the 3 parameters in the form of bits are “000”, and the mapping relationship is that each bit corresponds to 3 activated BWPs, and the corresponding activation is assumed when the parameter is 1.
  • Each parameter of at least one parameter corresponds to multiple activated BWPs, and the two are in a one-to-many relationship.
  • the one parameter is used to correspond to all activated BWPs in the multiple activated BWPs.
  • each parameter may correspond to a different multiple activated BWPs, respectively.
  • the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between a parameter and the 4 activated BWPs.
  • the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between one parameter and two of the activated BWPs, and a correspondence between the other parameter and the other two activated BWPs.
  • the two parameters in the bit form are "00" and the mapping relationship is that the first bit and the second bit correspond to the two activated BWPs before and after, respectively.
  • At least one parameter is multiple parameters, and there is a corresponding relationship between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs.
  • the switch command includes at least 3 parameters "000" and assuming that there are 8 activated BWPs
  • the 3 parameters can correspond to any one or more of the 8 activated BWPs, for example: 000 corresponds to all 8 Activated BWP; 001 corresponds to the first activated BWP; 010 corresponds to the first two activated BWP, etc.
  • any one of a plurality of parameters may form a parameter combination
  • any of a plurality of activated BWPs may also form a BWP combination to establish a correspondence between the parameter combination and the BWP combination.
  • the three parameters in the above example can also form a correspondence relationship between the parameter combination and the BWP combination in the form of a combination.
  • three parameters can be combined into eight parameter combinations as: "000" "001" ... "111 According to the IDs of the 8 activated BWPs are 1-8 respectively, then the 8 activated BWPs can form at least 8 different BWP combinations, which are recorded as: Combination 1: 1; Combination 2: 1-2; ... Combination 8 : 1-8.
  • the 8 parameter combinations formed by the 3 parameters in the switch command can be in one-to-one correspondence with 8 different BWP combinations in the 8 activated BWPs, such as the parameter combination "000” corresponding to BWP combination 1; the parameter combination "001” corresponding to BWP Combination 2; ...; The parameter combination "111" corresponds to BWP combination 8.
  • the third application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a CA, there are multiple activated CCs and only one activated BWP exists on each activated CC. Then the switching command at this time may include: at least one parameter; the mapping relationship includes: when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, a one-to-one correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated CCs; or at least one parameter is one When there are multiple parameters, the corresponding relationship between each parameter in at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs; or, when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, the parameter combination consisting of multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated CCs.
  • the switching command received by the terminal device from one activated CC can be realized, and the type of instruction information on other activated CCs can be switched.
  • the network device may send the handover command only on the CC of the primary cell, and can implement the switching of the indicated information type on the CC of the primary cell and / or any activated secondary cell.
  • the mapping relationship of this embodiment includes three possible implementation modes: 1
  • each parameter of the multiple parameters corresponds to an activated CC, and the two are in a one-to-one correspondence relationship.
  • the switch command can include 3 parameters. It is assumed that the 3 parameters in the form of bits are “000”, the mapping relationship is that each bit corresponds to 3 activated CCs, and the corresponding activation is assumed when the parameter is 1. The type of the indication information on the CC is switched.
  • Each of the at least one parameter corresponds to multiple activated CCs, and the two are in a one-to-many relationship.
  • the one parameter is used to correspond to all activated CCs in the multiple activated CCs; when at least one parameter is multiple, each parameter may correspond to a different multiple activated CCs, respectively.
  • the mapping relationship when the terminal equipment CA communicates with four activated CCs, when the switching command is a parameter, the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between a parameter and the four activated CCs. Or alternatively, when the switch command is two parameters, the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between one parameter and two of the activated CCs and a correspondence between the other parameter and the other two activated CCs. . Assume that the two parameters in the bit form are "00", and the mapping relationship is that the first bit and the second bit correspond to the two activated CCs before and after, respectively.
  • At least one parameter is multiple parameters, and there is a corresponding relationship between a parameter combination composed of multiple parameters and multiple activated CCs.
  • the switch command includes at least 3 parameters "000" and assuming that there are 8 activated CCs
  • the 3 parameters can correspond to any one or more of the 8 activated CCs, for example: 000 corresponds to all 8 Activated CC; 001 corresponds to the first activated CC; 010 corresponds to the first two activated CCs.
  • any one of a plurality of parameters may form a parameter combination, and a plurality of activated CCs among a plurality of activated CCs may also form a CC combination to establish a correspondence relationship between the parameter combination and the CC combination.
  • the three parameters in the above example can also form a correspondence relationship between the parameter combination and the CC combination in the form of a combination.
  • three parameters can be combined into eight parameter combinations as: "000" "001" ... "111" ;
  • the 8 activated CCs can form at least 8 different CC combinations, which are recorded as: Combination 1: 1; Combination 2: 1-2; ...; Combination 8 : 1-8.
  • the 8 parameter combinations composed of 3 parameters in the switch command can correspond to the 8 activated 8 different BWP combinations one-to-one, such as the parameter combination "000” corresponding to CC combination 1; the parameter combination "001” corresponding to CC Combination 2; ...;
  • the parameter combination "111" corresponds to CC combination 8.
  • the fourth application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a CA, there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs. Then the switching command at this time may include: at least one parameter; the mapping relationship includes: when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, one of the multiple parameters and each activated BWP in each activated CC in the multiple activated CCs A correspondence relationship; or, when at least one parameter is one or more parameters, a correspondence relationship between each parameter in at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs; or at least one parameter When there are multiple parameters, a correspondence between a parameter combination composed of multiple parameters in at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs.
  • the network device may send the handover command only on the CC of the primary cell, and can implement the indication information of the activated BWP on the CC of the primary cell and / or the CC of any activated secondary cell. Type switching.
  • the mapping relationship in this embodiment includes three possible implementation modes: 1 When at least one parameter is multiple parameters, each parameter in the multiple parameters corresponds to each activated BWP in each activated CC
  • the correspondence relationship between the two is one-to-one correspondence. For example: There are 2 activated CCs when the terminal CA communicates, and each activated CC has 2 activated BWP, so the switching command needs to include 4 parameters, assuming that it is expressed as "0000" in bit form, where each parameter is Corresponding to a total of 4 activated BWPs on 2 activated CCs. 2 Each parameter of the at least one parameter corresponds to multiple BWPs.
  • multiple activated BWPs may be possessed by one activated CC, or may be possessed by multiple activated CCs.
  • the one parameter is used to correspond to all BWPs on all activated CCs, so the mapping relationship may be one between a parameter and a total of 4 activated BWPs on 2 activated CCs. Many-to-many correspondence.
  • each parameter may respectively correspond to multiple BWPs on one or more activated CCs.
  • the mapping relationship may include one of the parameters and The one-to-two correspondence between the first activated BWP of the first activated CC, the first activated BWP of the second activated CC, and the other parameter with the second activated CC A one-to-two correspondence between the second activated BWP and the second activated BWP of the second activated CC.
  • the two parameters in the bit form are "00”
  • the terminal device receives the handover command "10”
  • the first activated BWP and the second one of the first activated CC are determined according to the handover command and the mapping relationship.
  • the type of the indication information on the first activated BWP of the activated CC needs to be switched.
  • At least one parameter is a plurality of parameters, and there is a corresponding relationship between a parameter combination composed of a plurality of parameters and a plurality of BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs.
  • the switching command includes at least 3 parameters "000”, and it is also assumed that there are 2 activated CCs, each activated CC has 4 activated BWPs, and a total of 8 activated BWPs.
  • the 3 parameters can correspond to any one or more of a total of 8 activated BWPs, for example: 000 corresponds to all 8 activated BWPs; 001 corresponds to the first activated BWP on the first activated CC; 010 corresponds to All activated BWPs on the first activated CC, etc.
  • any of multiple parameters may form a parameter combination, and any of multiple activated BWPs in multiple activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs may also form an activated BWP group. Establish the correspondence between parameter combinations and BWP combinations, and multiple BWPs in a BWP combination can come from one or more activated CCs.
  • the three parameters in the above example can be combined into eight parameter combinations: "000”, “001” ... "111”; then a total of 8 activated BWPs can be combined to form at least 8 different BWP combinations. 1: 1; combination 2: 1-2; ... combination 8: 1-8. Then the 8 parameter combinations formed by the 3 parameters in the switch command can be in one-to-one correspondence with 8 BWP combinations, such as parameter combination "000” corresponding to BWP combination 1; parameter combination "001” corresponding to BWP combination 2 ... parameter combination " 111 "corresponds to BWP combination 8.
  • the BWP group here may not consider which activated CC each activated BWP comes from, and the activated BWP included in each group may be activated BWP on the same or different activated CC.
  • the network device in S101 generates a switching command after determining that the instruction information of the terminal device needs to be switched from the first type to the second type. Specifically, how to make the network device determine that the handover command can be generated.
  • This application provides several methods for determining the network device to determine the handover command, which will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7 respectively.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method of the present application.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 shows a method in which a terminal device determines whether to switch the type of instruction information according to a switching criterion. If the terminal device determines that the type of the instruction information needs to be switched, the terminal device sends a switching request to a network device to Request to switch the type of instruction information.
  • this embodiment further includes:
  • S201 The terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion; then executes S202: the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used to request the type of handover instruction information from the network device.
  • the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not meet the handover criteria, the terminal device will not send a handover request to the network device, and the network device will not perform the request without receiving the handover request.
  • a subsequent S101 generates a switching command. That is, when the terminal device judges that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not meet the handover criterion, the type of the indication information of the existing terminal device is not switched.
  • the determination of the service density between the terminal device and the network device in S201 may be configured to be performed periodically, and the terminal device executes the service between the terminal device and the network device in S201 at a fixed interval. Judgment of density.
  • the handover criterion includes: if the first type of indication information is GTS, the service density within a fixed time period T between the terminal device and the network device is lower than the first preset threshold; if the first type of indication information is WUS, the terminal The service density within a fixed time period T between the device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  • the service density may be the number of data radio bearers (DRBs) of the terminal equipment, the sum of the throughput of each DRB of the terminal equipment, the average throughput of each DRB of the terminal equipment, or the maximum DRB throughput of the terminal equipment, Or the number of times the terminal device has been paged in a unit time.
  • DRBs data radio bearers
  • the network device sends the indication information GTS to the terminal device only before or during a DRX cycle that does not need to monitor the PDCCH and receive the PDSCH. Therefore, once the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than the first preset threshold, the terminal device determines that its service is infrequent, and does not need to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH in most DRX cycles. It is required that the network device sends a GTS instruction to the terminal device before each DRX cycle. At this time, the first type of instruction information GTS needs to be switched to the second type of instruction information to reduce the transmission of the instruction information GTS. Preferably, the handover criterion may further instruct to switch the GTS to WUS when the service density is lower than the first preset threshold.
  • the network device needs to send the instruction information WUS to the terminal device before or during each DRX cycle that needs to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH, so that the terminal device can The instruction is processed and is active during the activation time of the DRX cycle. Therefore, once the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than the first preset threshold, the terminal device determines that its service is more frequent and needs to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH in most DRX cycles. It is not necessary for the network device to send a WUS instruction message to the terminal device before each DRX cycle.
  • the handover criterion may further instruct to switch the WUS to the GTS when the service density is higher than the second preset threshold.
  • the present application provides a communication method of indication information, so that when the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion, the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device, and then the network device sends the request to the terminal.
  • the device sends a switch command, so that the network device and the terminal device use different instruction information for communication, so as to meet different usage scenarios of the terminal device, improve the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption of the terminal device. Volume and communication overhead.
  • the network device after the network device receives the handover request sent by the terminal device in S202, the network device further needs to determine the handover request of the terminal device to determine whether the terminal device can perform It requests to switch the type of the indication information. If it is determined that the switching of the instruction information type can be performed, the network device executes S101 to generate a switching command of the terminal device; if it is determined that the switching of the instruction information type cannot be performed, the network device does not execute S101 to generate the switching command of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may notify the terminal device that the switching request is invalid in the form of a return message.
  • this application provides two possible ways for a network device to determine whether a terminal device can switch the type of instruction information according to its switching request.
  • the network device determines whether the terminal device can perform handover after receiving the handover request of the terminal device. .
  • the network device may determine whether the type of the instruction information of the terminal device can be switched by determining whether the switching request and / or other information meets a condition of the type of instruction information of the terminal device switching. For example, if the terminal device determines that the type of the instruction information needs to be switched to WUS according to the manner in the foregoing embodiment, it sends a switching request to the network device. After the network device receives the handover request sent by the terminal device, the network device considers the available resources on the network side according to the handover request of the terminal device.
  • the instruction information of the terminal device is switched to WUS After that, the overhead of network resources will be further increased, affecting the status of network resources, it is determined that the switching request of the terminal device cannot be responded to, that is, S101 is not executed; if the network resource overhead is small at this time, the instruction information of the terminal device may be allowed to switch to WUS , It is determined that the type of the indication information of the terminal device can be switched.
  • the types of indication information used by different terminal devices in the same cell need to maintain the same application scenario.
  • the network device After receiving a handover request from a terminal device, the network device needs to consider all terminals in the cell. device. Therefore, the network device determines the number of handover requests sent from all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located. If the number is greater than a preset threshold, the network device determines the type of the terminal device's instruction information to perform handover; if the number is less than the preset threshold, Then the network device determines that the type of the indication information of the terminal device cannot be switched.
  • the network device needs to determine whether to switch the indication information used by all terminals in the cell from the overall perspective of the cell. For example, there are 10 terminal devices in a certain cell, all of which are configured with the first type of indication information.
  • a network device receives a handover request from a terminal device in the cell, it determines whether other handover requests have been received within a certain period of time. A handover request sent by a terminal device.
  • a handover request from the other 4 terminal devices is also received, and the number of terminal devices requesting the information type switching is more than half, determine the instructions for all terminal devices in the cell Information to switch. If a network device does not receive a handover request from another terminal device within a certain period of time after receiving a handover request from a terminal device in the cell, the handover request sent by the terminal is not processed, and the In a possible embodiment, the network device may also notify the terminal device that the handover request is not processed by way of feedback information.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 shows a manner in which the network device determines whether to switch the type of the indication information according to the switching criterion, and when the switching is needed, the network device sends a switching command to the terminal device.
  • this embodiment further includes:
  • S301 The network determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device satisfies a handover criterion; then executes the network device in S101 to generate a handover command. In addition, if the network device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not satisfy the handover criterion, S101 will not be performed. That is, when the network device judges that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not satisfy the handover criterion, the type of the indication information of the existing terminal device is not switched.
  • the determination of the service density between the network device and the terminal device in S301 may also be configured to be executed periodically, and the network device performs the determination in S301 every fixed time interval.
  • the handover criterion used by the network device to determine whether the service density is satisfied may be a handover criterion that may be used as described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
  • the specific judgment basis is the same, and details are not described again.
  • the handover criterion here may be different from the handover criterion in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
  • the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 determines that the type of instruction information of the terminal device needs to be switched, the form of the switching command generated by S101 is the same as that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 by the network. After the device receives the handover request sent by the terminal device, it uses the form of the handover command generated by S101.
  • the two handover command forms may be the same or different.
  • the network device determines that the type of instruction information of the terminal device needs to be switched in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, because the terminal device cannot determine whether the type of instruction information needs to be switched and how to switch the type of instruction information, the network device The switching command sent to the terminal device needs to include a specific type indicated by the network device, and the terminal device needs to switch the type of the instruction information according to the specific type.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device determines that the type of handover instruction information is required, it sends a handover request to the network device, and the network device determines whether the terminal device can perform handover according to the handover request. Therefore, although the terminal device has determined that its instruction information needs to be switched after the judgment of S201, it is still necessary to send a handover request for the network device to determine whether the instruction information of the terminal device can be switched. If the network device determines that the instruction information of the terminal device is switchable, it generates a switching command and sends it to the terminal device. At this time, the switching command may not include the type of the instruction information or the type of the instruction information.
  • the terminal device can determine the type of the indication information according to the switching command after receiving the switching command, and the type of the indication information can be switched to that determined by the terminal device in S201. After receiving the handover command, the terminal device determines the type of the instruction information that needs to be handed over according to the handover command, the type of the currently monitored instruction information, and the handover relationship. The handover relationship is the same.
  • the terminal device may be configured in advance and stored in the terminal device, or the handover relationship may be carried in the handover command and sent by the network device to the terminal device in real time. In the embodiment of FIG.
  • the type of the indication information in the switching command may be the same as or different from the type requested by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the switching command, it Switch the type of instruction information in.
  • the form of the handover command in the above embodiment is an example, and the specific form of the handover command is not limited in this application.
  • a network device or a terminal device can determine whether to switch the type of instruction information according to the service density between the two. If it is determined according to the judgment criterion that the type of instruction information needs to be judged , The network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, so that the terminal device completes the switching of the instruction information type, so that when the switching condition of the instruction information is satisfied, the network device and the terminal device can be switched according to the switching command sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the users use different types of instruction information for communication, so as to meet different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, improve the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 shows a terminal device provided in this embodiment, and the terminal device may be a terminal device in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the terminal device 800 includes:
  • the transceiver module 801 is configured to receive a switching command from a network device; wherein the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type;
  • a processing module 820 configured to determine the second type of configuration information according to the switching command
  • the processing module 820 is further configured to monitor the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
  • the terminal device provided in this embodiment can execute the instruction information communication method shown in FIG. 5.
  • the implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
  • the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
  • the processing module 820 is specifically configured to determine at least one activated CC or the second type of configuration information on at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship; the processing module 820 is specifically configured to , Monitoring the second type of indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
  • the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; at least one parameter is used to indicate existence Switching the type of the indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP of the mapping relationship from a first type to a second type;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP; or, each parameter of at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP Correspondence between multiple activated BWPs; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in at least one activated BWP;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs; or each parameter of at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated CCs; or correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs in multiple activated CCs;
  • the mapping relationship includes: at least one parameter corresponds to each activated BWP that each activated CC has in each of the multiple activated CCs A relationship between each parameter of at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs of one or more activated CCs of the plurality of activated CCs; or, a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs Correspondence of one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs among the activated CCs.
  • the transceiver module 810 sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used to request the type of the handover instruction information from the network device.
  • the handover criterion includes: if the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold; if the first type of power The saving signal is WUS, and the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than the second preset threshold.
  • the switching command includes: second type of indication information; or,
  • the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the instruction information; the processing module 820 is specifically configured to determine the second type of configuration information according to the type switching command, the first type of instruction information, and the switching relationship; wherein the switching relationship includes each of the instruction information The conversion relationship between types.
  • the processing module 820 is specifically configured to, if it is determined that the monitoring circuit used by the terminal device to monitor the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are different, it will be used to monitor the first type
  • the detection circuit of the instruction information is switched to a monitoring circuit for monitoring the second type of instruction information; and / or, if it is determined that the monitoring location used by the terminal device to monitor the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information is different, Then, the monitoring position of the first type of instruction information is switched to the monitoring position of the second type of instruction information.
  • the terminal devices provided in the foregoing embodiments may be used in the corresponding indication information communication method in the foregoing embodiments, and the implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device of the present application.
  • the terminal device provided in this embodiment includes a transceiver 910, a processor 920, and a memory 930.
  • the memory 930 stores instructions or programs
  • the processor 920 is configured to execute the instructions or programs stored in the memory 930.
  • the processor 920 is configured to perform the operations performed by the processing module 820 in the foregoing embodiment
  • the transceiver 910 is configured to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 810 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • terminal device 800 or the terminal device 900 may correspond to the terminal device in the instruction information communication method of the foregoing embodiments of the present invention, and the operations and operations of each module in the terminal device 800 or the terminal device 900 The / or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the methods in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, and are not repeated here for brevity.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a network device provided in this embodiment, and the network device may be the network device in any one of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the network device 1000 includes a transceiver module 1010 and a processing module 1020.
  • the processing module 1020 is configured to generate a switching command; the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type; the transceiver module 1010 is used to send a switching command to the terminal device;
  • the command determines the configuration information of the second type, and monitors the indication information of the second type according to the configuration information of the second type.
  • the network device provided in this embodiment can execute the instruction information communication method shown in FIG. 5.
  • the implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
  • the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
  • the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; at least one parameter is used to indicate existence Switching the type of the indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP of the mapping relationship from a first type to a second type;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP; or, each parameter of at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP Correspondence between multiple activated BWPs; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in at least one activated BWP;
  • the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs; or each parameter of at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated CCs; or correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs in multiple activated CCs;
  • the mapping relationship includes: at least one parameter corresponds to each activated BWP that each activated CC has in each of the multiple activated CCs A relationship between each parameter of at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs of one or more activated CCs of the plurality of activated CCs; or, a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs Correspondence of one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs among the activated CCs.
  • the transceiver module 1010 is further configured to receive a handover request from the terminal device; wherein the handover request is used for the terminal device to request the type of the handover instruction information from the network device.
  • the processing module 1020 is specifically configured to generate a handover command if it is determined that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion.
  • the handover criterion includes: if the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold; if the first type of power The saving signal is WUS, and the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than the second preset threshold.
  • the processing module 1020 is specifically configured to determine that the type of the instruction information of the terminal device can be switched and generate a switching command; the processing module 1020 is specifically configured to:
  • the type of the indication information of the terminal device may be switched.
  • the switching command includes: a second type of indication information; or, the switching command includes: a type switching indication of the indication information.
  • the network devices provided in the foregoing embodiments may be used for the corresponding indication information communication method in the foregoing embodiments, and the implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application.
  • the terminal device provided in this embodiment includes a transceiver 1110, a processor 1120, and a memory 1130.
  • the memory 1130 stores instructions or programs
  • the processor 1120 is configured to execute the instructions or programs stored in the memory 1130.
  • the processor 1120 is configured to perform the operations performed by the processing module 1020 in the foregoing embodiment
  • the transceiver 1110 is configured to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1010 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • terminal device 1000 or the terminal device 1100 may correspond to the terminal device in the instruction information communication method of the foregoing embodiments of the present invention, and the operations of various modules in the terminal device 1000 or the terminal device 1100 and The / or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the methods in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, and are not repeated here for brevity.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a circuit.
  • the communication device may be configured to perform an action performed by a terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device.
  • the processor is mainly used for processing communication protocols and communication data, controlling terminal devices, executing software programs, and processing data of the software programs.
  • the memory is mainly used for storing software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input / output devices such as a touch screen, a display screen, and a keyboard, are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have an input / output device.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
  • the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 12 In an actual terminal equipment product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • an antenna and a radio frequency circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as a transmitting and receiving unit of a terminal device, and a processor having a processing function may be regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing single board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 1210 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1210 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may also be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform the sending operation and the reception operation on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment
  • processing unit 1220 is configured to perform operations other than the transceiver operation on the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform a receiving operation of the terminal-side device in S102 in FIG. 5, and / or the transceiver unit 1210 is further configured to perform other transceiver steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1220 is configured to execute S103 and S104 in FIG. 5, and / or the processing unit 1220 is further configured to execute other processing steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform the sending operation of S202 and the receiving operation of S102 in FIG. 6, and / or the transceiver unit 1210 is further configured to perform other operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application Send and receive steps.
  • the processing unit 1220 is configured to execute S201, S103, and S104 in FIG. 5, and / or the processing unit 1220 is also used to execute other processing steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform a receiving operation of the terminal-side device in S102 in FIG. 7, and / or the transceiver unit 1210 is further configured to perform other operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1220 is configured to execute S103 and S104 in FIG. 7, and / or the processing unit 1220 is further configured to execute other processing steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip When the communication device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input / output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device may perform functions similar to the processor 920 in FIG. 9.
  • the device includes a processor 1310, a transmitting data processor 1320, and a receiving data processor 1330.
  • the processing module 810 in the above embodiment may be the processor 1310 in FIG. 13 and perform corresponding functions.
  • the transceiver module 820 in the above embodiment may be the sending data processor 1320 and / or the receiving data processor 1330 in FIG. 13.
  • a channel encoder and a channel decoder are shown in FIG. 13, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, but are only schematic.
  • FIG. 14 shows another form of this embodiment, and FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing device 1400 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment may serve as a modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1403 and an interface 1404.
  • the processor 1403 performs the functions of the processing module 820
  • the interface 1304 performs the functions of the transceiver module 810.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1406, a processor 1403, and a program stored on the memory 1406 and executable on the processor.
  • the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is implemented.
  • Methods It should be noted that the memory 1406 may be non-volatile or volatile, and its location may be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1400, as long as the memory 1406 can be connected to the memory 1406. The processor 1403 is sufficient.
  • a computer-readable storage medium which stores instructions thereon, and when the instructions are executed, the method on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is executed.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, and when the instructions are executed, the method on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is executed.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and application-specific integrated circuits (DSPs).
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • DSPs application-specific integrated circuits
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA off-the-shelf Programmable Gate Array
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present invention may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), and an electronic memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM Static Random Access Memory
  • DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double SDRAM, DDR SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory
  • Synchronous DRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • Enhanced SDRAM Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Synchrobus RAM, SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA, or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component
  • the memory memory module
  • memory described herein is intended to include, but is not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disks, mobile hard disks, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks or compact discs, and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a communication method and apparatus for indication information. Said method comprises: a terminal device generating and sending to a network device a switching command for switching the type of indication information from a first type to a second type, such that the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the switching command and then monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information. The communication method and apparatus for indication information provided in the present application can enable a terminal device to switch different indication information for communication, thereby satisfying different use scenarios of the terminal device, improving the switching flexibility of the indication information of the terminal, and further reducing the power consumption and communication overheads of the terminal device.

Description

指示信息通信方法及装置Instruction information communication method and device
本申请要求于2018年09月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为2018111631960、申请名称为“指示信息通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority from a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on September 30, 2018, with an application number of 2018111631960, and an application name of "Indicating Information and Communication Methods and Devices", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术,尤其涉及一种指示信息通信方法及装置。The present application relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a method and device for communicating instruction information.
背景技术Background technique
非连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)通信中一种用于减少终端设备功耗的技术。DRX技术可以让终端设备在每个DRX周期的某些时候进入休眠状态,不去监听物理下行共享信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH);而在DRX周期的某些时候进入需要监听的时候进入激活状态,以监听PDCCH。从而使得终端设备不会一直处在监听PDCCH的状态,而达到节省终端设备耗电量、改善续航能力的目的,以提升终端设备的用户体验。Discontinuous reception (DRX) is a technology used to reduce power consumption of terminal equipment in long term evolution (LTE) communications. DRX technology allows terminal equipment to enter the dormant state at certain times in each DRX cycle and does not monitor the physical downlink shared channel (PDCCH); and enters the activation when the DRX cycle needs to be monitored at certain times Status to listen to the PDCCH. Therefore, the terminal device will not be in the state of monitoring the PDCCH all the time, and the purpose of saving the power consumption of the terminal device and improving the endurance can be achieved, so as to improve the user experience of the terminal device.
在新空口(new radio,NR)系统中,由于高速数据传输业务的比重增加并且最高速率提升明显,因此终端设备与网络设备之间通信的数据可能以突发的形式产生并在短时间内完成。为了进一步地提升终端设备的性能,NR中还在DRX基础上提供了指示信息的机制(如:唤醒信号(wake up signal,WUS)和休眠信号(go-to-sleep signal,GTS),以进一步节省终端设备的耗电量。其中,在WUS的机制中,终端设备如果收到DRX周期对应的WUS信号,则在该DRX周期处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或者接收物理下行共享信道(Physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH);终端设备如果没有收到DRX周期对应的WUS信号,则在该DRX周期处于休眠状态不去监听PDCCH或者不接收PDSCH。而在GTS的机制中,终端设备如果收到DRX对应的GTS信号,则在该DRX周期处于休眠状态不去监听PDCCH或者不接收PDSCH;终端设备如果没有收到DRX周期对应的WUS信号,则在该DRX周期处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或者接收PDSCH。In a new radio (NR) system, because the proportion of high-speed data transmission services increases and the maximum rate increases significantly, the data communicated between terminal equipment and network equipment may be generated in bursts and completed in a short time. . In order to further improve the performance of terminal equipment, NR also provides a mechanism for indicating information based on DRX (such as: wakeup signal (WUS) and go-to-sleep signal (GTS)) to further Save power consumption of terminal equipment. In the WUS mechanism, if the terminal equipment receives the WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, it will be activated in the DRX cycle and monitor the PDCCH or receive the physical downlink shared channel. , PDSCH); If the terminal device does not receive the WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, it does not monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH during the DRX cycle. However, in the GTS mechanism, the terminal device receives the GTS corresponding to the DRX. Signal, it is in a sleep state in the DRX cycle and does not monitor the PDCCH or receive PDSCH; if the terminal device does not receive a WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, it is in an active state in the DRX cycle and monitors the PDCCH or receives PDSCH.
对于NR系统中业务较多的终端设备更适用GTS机制,需要该终端经常处在激活状态只有业务结束时才可通过GTS信号进行休眠;而业务较少的终端设备更适用WUS机制,需要该终端设备经常处在休眠状态只有需要处理业务时才通过WUS信号进行唤醒。但现有技术中,WUS信号和GTS信号只能择一作为功率节省应用在NR系统所有的终端设备中,NR系统并不能为不同的终端设备动态地确定更为合适的指示信息。这样,对于配置了WUS机制的终端设备如果业务较为频繁,每个DRX周期前都还需要额外再接收并处理一个WUS的指示信息,不仅没有节省终端设备的耗电量,还因为频繁进行指示信息的接收和处理增加了终端设备的耗电量。而对于配置了GTS机制的终端设备如果业务不频繁,每个DRX周期前处于休眠模式的终端设备还需要接收并处理一个GTS的指示信息,同样对于终端设备的耗电量的节省程度有限。因此,如何克服采用单一 类型指示信息所带来的前述问题,是目前亟待解决的技术问题。The terminal device with more services in the NR system is more suitable for the GTS mechanism. It is required that the terminal is always in the activated state. Only when the service ends, the GTS signal can be used for sleep. The terminal device with fewer services is more suitable for the WUS mechanism and requires the terminal. The device is often in a sleep state and only wakes up through a WUS signal when it needs to process services. However, in the prior art, only one of the WUS signal and the GTS signal can be used as a power saving application in all terminal devices of the NR system. The NR system cannot dynamically determine more suitable indication information for different terminal devices. In this way, if the terminal device configured with the WUS mechanism has frequent services, an additional WUS instruction message needs to be received and processed before each DRX cycle, which not only does not save the power consumption of the terminal device, but also performs the instruction information frequently. Reception and processing increase the power consumption of the terminal equipment. However, if the terminal device configured with the GTS mechanism is infrequent, the terminal device in the sleep mode before each DRX cycle needs to receive and process a GTS indication message, and the power saving of the terminal device is also limited. Therefore, how to overcome the aforementioned problems brought about by the use of a single type of instruction information is a technical problem to be solved urgently at present.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本申请提供一种指示信息通信方法与设备,以通过网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,使得网络设备和终端设备二者之间切换不同类型的指示信息进行通信,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景和业务的动态变化,提高终端的指示信息的切换灵活性,进一步降低终端设备的功耗和通信开销。The present application provides a method and device for indicating information communication, so as to send a switching command to a terminal device through a network device, so that the network device and the terminal device switch between different types of instruction information for communication, thereby satisfying different use scenarios of the terminal device And the dynamic change of services, improve the flexibility of switching the terminal's instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of terminal equipment.
本申请第一方面提供一种指示信息通信方法,包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令;其中,所述切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;A first aspect of the present application provides a method for communicating indication information, including: a terminal device receiving a handover command from a network device; wherein the handover command is used to switch a type of the indication information from a first type to a second type;
所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息;Determining, by the terminal device, configuration information of a second type according to the switching command;
所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。The terminal device monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,能够通过终端设备生成并向网络设备发送的用于将指示信息类型由第一类型切换为第二类型的切换命令,使得终端设备根据该切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息后,根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。从而使得终端设备能够切换不同的指示信息进行通信,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景和业务的动态变化,提高终端的指示信息的切换灵活性,进一步降低终端设备的功耗和通信开销。Therefore, the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment can be used by a terminal device to generate and send to a network device a switching command for switching the type of instruction information from a first type to a second type, so that the terminal device determines according to the switching command After the second type of configuration information, the second type of indication information is monitored according to the second type of configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device can switch different instruction information for communication, thereby satisfying different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, improving the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reducing the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
可选地,在本申请第一方面一实施例中,指示信息的类型至少包括:休眠信号GTS和唤醒信号WUS。Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,通过结合上述实施例中指示信息类型的切换方式,针对现有技术中使用较多的休眠信号和唤醒信号进行判断,能够实现两种指示信息类型的相互切换。克服了现有技术中指示信息的类型只能固定GTS或WUS其中一种导致的指示信息的使用较为单一的不足。Therefore, the method for communicating instruction information provided by this embodiment, by combining the switching method of the instruction information type in the foregoing embodiment, and judging the use of more sleep signals and wake-up signals in the prior art, can realize two types of instruction information. Switch between each other. The shortcoming of the prior art that the type of the indication information can only be fixed to one of GTS or WUS is relatively simple.
可选地,在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述终端根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,包括:Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the terminal determining the second type of configuration information according to the handover command includes:
所述终端设备根据所述切换命令和所述映射关系确定所述至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上的第二类型的配置信息;Determining, by the terminal device, the second type of configuration information on the at least one activated CC or the at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship;
所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息,包括:The monitoring, by the terminal device according to the configuration information of the second type, the indication information of the second type includes:
所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息在所述至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上监测第二类型的指示信息。The terminal device monitors the second type of indication information on the at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,对于终端设备在每个CC或者每个BWP上处理不同的业务时,网络设备能够根据切换命令以及映射关系为不同的CC或者不同的BWP上的不同业务下达指示信息切换的命令,进而丰富切换命令的应用场景、提高切换命令的指示效率。The instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment, when a terminal device processes different services on each CC or each BWP, the network device can deliver different services on different CCs or different BWPs according to a handover command and a mapping relationship. A command for instructing information switching, thereby enriching the application scenarios of the switching command and improving the instruction efficiency of the switching command.
可选地,在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,所述至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;所述至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter is mapped to at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP Relationship; the at least one parameter is used to indicate that the type of the indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP where the mapping relationship exists is switched from the first type to the second type;
当存在一个载波且所述一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所 述至少一个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is a carrier and the one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and the plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中的多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,对于终端设备在每个激活的CC或者每个激活的BWP上处理不同的业务时,网络设备能够根据切换命令以及映射关系为不同的激活的CC或者不同的激活的BWP上的不同业务下达指示信息切换的命令。具体地切换命令中包括的至少一个参数,以及至少一个参数与至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP之间的映射关系,使得终端设备能够根据映射关系确定所接收到的切换命令对应的激活的CC或者激活的BWP上指示信息的切换,进而丰富切换命令的应用场景、提高切换命令的指示效率。Therefore, according to the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment, when a terminal device processes different services on each activated CC or each activated BWP, the network device can perform different activated CCs or Different services on different activated BWPs issue instructions to switch information. Specifically, at least one parameter included in the handover command and a mapping relationship between the at least one parameter and at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP, so that the terminal device can determine the activation corresponding to the received handover command according to the mapping relationship. The switching of the indication information on the CC or the activated BWP further enriches the application scenarios of the handover command and improves the instruction efficiency of the handover command.
可选地在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令之前,还包括:Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, before the terminal device receives a handover command from a network device, the method further includes:
若所述终端设备判断所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送切换请求;其中,所述切换请求用于向所述网络设备请求切换所述指示信息的类型。If the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device satisfies a handover criterion, the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used for the network device Request to switch the type of the indication information.
可选地,在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述切换准则包括:Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the handover criterion includes:
若所述第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;If the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
若所述第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。If the first type of power saving signal is WUS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,能够由网络设备或者终端设备根据二者间的业务密度对是否切换指示信息的类型进行判断,若根据判断准则确定需要进行指示信息类型的判断,则网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,使得终端设备完成指示信息类型的切换,从而能够在满足指示条件的切换条件时,根据网络设备向终端设备发送的切换命令,使得网络设备和终端设备二者之间使用不同的指示信息进行通信,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景,提高终端的指示信息的切换灵活性,并进一步降低终端设备的耗电量和通信开销。Therefore, the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment can determine whether to switch the type of instruction information according to the service density between the two. If it is determined according to the judgment criteria that the type of instruction information needs to be judged, then The network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, so that the terminal device completes the switching of the instruction information type, so that when the switching condition of the indicated condition is met, according to the switching command sent by the network device to the terminal device, both the network device and the terminal device Use different instruction information for communication between them, so as to meet different usage scenarios of the terminal device, improve the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
可选地,在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述切换命令包括:所述第二类型的指示信息;Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the switching command includes: the second type of indication information;
或者,所述切换命令包括:所述指示信息的类型切换指示;则所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息包括:所述终端设备根据所述类型切换命令、所述第一类型的指示信息和切换关系确定所述第二类型的配置信息;其中,所述切换关系包括所述指示信息的各种类型之间的转换关系。Alternatively, the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the indication information; then the terminal device determining the second type of configuration information according to the switching command includes: the terminal device according to the type switching command, the first A type of indication information and a handover relationship determine the second type of configuration information; wherein the handover relationship includes a conversion relationship between various types of the indication information.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,提供了两种不同形式的切换命令,终端设备可以通过任一种切换命令指示终端设备的指示信息的类型切换。Therefore, the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment provides two different forms of handover commands, and the terminal device may instruct the terminal device to switch the type of the instruction information by using any of the handover commands.
可选地,在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,包括:若所述终端设备判断所述终端设备监测所述第一类型的指示信息与所述第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路不同,则所述终端设备将用于监测所述第一类型的指示信息的检测电路切换为用于监测所述第二类型的指示信息的监测电路;和/或,若所述终端设备判断所述终端设备监测所述第一类型的指示信息与所述第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测位置不同,则所述终端设备将所述第一类型的指示信息的监测位置切换为所述第二类型的指示信息的监测位置。Optionally, in an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the determining, by the terminal device, the second type of configuration information according to the switching command includes: if the terminal device determines that the terminal device monitors the first type Is different from the monitoring circuit used by the second type of instruction information, the terminal device switches the detection circuit for monitoring the first type of instruction information to monitor the second type of information. A monitoring circuit for instruction information; and / or, if the terminal device judges that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the monitoring location used by the second type of instruction information is different, the terminal device Switching the monitoring position of the first type of instruction information to the monitoring position of the second type of instruction information.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法,由于不同类型的指示信息有可能信号设计不同,造成了终端设备在接收不同类型的指示信息时所使用的检测电路或者接收位置不同,则在本步骤中,终端设备在配置第二类型的配置信息时,需要将第一类型的指示信息与第二类型的指示信息进行对比。如果第一类型的指示信息和第二类型的指示信息的信号设计相同,或者终端设备接收第一类型的指示信息和第二类型的指示信息所使用的相关配置信息相同,则可以将终端在之前监测第一类型的指示信息时所使用的第一类型的配置信息,直接作为第二类型的配置信息,不需要更改终端设备已有的配置信息。相反地,如果终端设备判断第一类型的指示信息和第二类型指示信息的信号设计不同,就需要更改相关指示信息的配置信息。Therefore, the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment may have different signal designs for different types of instruction information, which results in different detection circuits or receiving locations used by the terminal device when receiving different types of instruction information. In this step, When the terminal device configures the second type of configuration information, it is necessary to compare the first type of instruction information with the second type of instruction information. If the signal design of the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are the same, or the terminal device receives the same configuration information used by the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information, the terminal may be placed before The first type of configuration information used when monitoring the first type of instruction information is directly used as the second type of configuration information, and there is no need to change the existing configuration information of the terminal device. Conversely, if the terminal device determines that the signal design of the first type of indication information and the second type of indication information are different, it is necessary to change the configuration information of the related indication information.
在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述切换命令的形式为下行控制信息DCI、MAC CE,或者承载于DCI、MAC CE、无线资源控制RRC信令中的任一种;或者,所述切换命令承载于系统信息中。具体地,本实施例提供的切换命令针对若同一小区内的终端设备使用相同的指示信息的类型,则切换命令承载在系统信息中;而若同一小区内的终端设备使用不同的指示信息的类型,可以通过下行控制信息DCI、MAC CE,或者承载于DCI、MAC CE、无线资源控制RRC信令中的任一种来实现切换命令的发送,提高了切换命令的灵活性。In an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the handover command is in the form of downlink control information DCI, MAC CE, or any one of the DCI, MAC CE, and radio resource control RRC signaling; or, The switch command is carried in the system information. Specifically, the handover command provided in this embodiment is directed to that if terminal devices in the same cell use the same type of instruction information, the handover command is carried in the system information; and if terminal devices in the same cell use different types of instruction information , The downlink control information DCI, MAC CE, or any of the DCI, MAC CE, and radio resource control RRC signaling can be used to implement the handover command transmission, which improves the flexibility of the handover command.
在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述切换命令还包括:所述切换命令的持续时间;In an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, the switching command further includes: a duration of the switching command;
所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息包括:所述终端设备在所述持续时间内根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息;所述终端设备在所述持续时间之后终端设备确定第一类型的配置信息,并根据所述第一类型的配置信息监测第一类型的指示信息。The monitoring of the second type of indication information by the terminal device according to the second type of configuration information includes: the terminal device monitoring the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information within the duration; The terminal device determines the first type of configuration information after the duration, and monitors the first type of indication information according to the first type of configuration information.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息切换方法,能够使得网络设备能够根据业务需求指示终端设备在一定时间内监测切换为第二类型的指示信息并在该段时间之后恢复监测切换前第一类型的指示信息,提高了指示信息切换的灵活程度丰富了应用场景。Therefore, the method for switching the instruction information provided in this embodiment can enable the network device to instruct the terminal device to monitor and switch to the second type of instruction information within a certain period of time and resume monitoring of the first type before the switchover according to service requirements. Instruction information improves the flexibility of instruction information switching and enriches application scenarios.
在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令之后,还包括:所述终端设备启动预设时间的定时器;所述终端设备在所述定时器超时后所 述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息。In an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, after the terminal device receives a handover command from a network device, the terminal device further includes: the terminal device starts a timer of a preset time; the terminal device after the timer expires The terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the switching command.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息切换方法,终端设备可以根据终端设备的业务到达情况、业务时延要求或者终端设备的其他策略,在收到切换命令后并不立即执行,而是开启预设时间的定时器,这里的预设时间可以随时进行调整,以满足不同业务的需求。Therefore, according to the instruction information switching method provided in this embodiment, the terminal device may not execute immediately after receiving the switching command according to the service arrival status of the terminal device, service delay requirements, or other policies of the terminal device, but may open a preset Time timer, the preset time here can be adjusted at any time to meet the needs of different businesses.
在本申请第一方面一实施例中,所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息之后,还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送切换确认信息;其中,所述切换确认信息用于向所述网络设备通知所述终端设备已根据所述切换命令确定所述第二类型的配置信息。In an embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, after the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the handover command, the method further includes: the terminal device sending handover confirmation information to the network device; The handover confirmation information is used to notify the network device that the terminal device has determined the second type of configuration information according to the handover command.
因此,本实施例提供的指示信息切换方法,能够在终端设备已经使切换命令生效,并做好了监测第二类型的指示信息的准备后,终端设备向网络设备发送确认信息进行确认,使得网络设备和终端设备统一进行指示信息的类型的切换,提高了指示信息通信时的容错性。Therefore, the method for switching instruction information provided in this embodiment can enable the terminal device to send confirmation information to the network device for confirmation after the terminal device has made the switching command effective and is ready to monitor the second type of instruction information, so that the network The device and the terminal device switch the type of the instruction information uniformly, which improves the fault tolerance when the instruction information is communicated.
本申请第二方面提供一种指示信息通信方法,包括:网络设备生成切换命令;其中,所述切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;A second aspect of the present application provides a method for communicating indication information, including: a network device generates a handover command; wherein the handover command is used to switch the type of the indication information from a first type to a second type;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述切换命令;以使所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,并根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。The network device sends the handover command to the terminal device; so that the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the handover command, and monitors the second type of indication according to the second type of configuration information information.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述指示信息的类型至少包括:休眠信号GTS和唤醒信号WUS。In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,所述至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;所述至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; the The at least one parameter is used to indicate that the type of the indication information on the at least one activated CC or the at least one activated BWP where the mapping relationship exists is switched from the first type to the second type;
当存在一个载波且所述一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is a carrier and the one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP ;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and a plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中的多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述网络设备生成切换命令之前,还包括:所述网络设备接收来自终端设备的切换请求;其中,所述切换请求用于所述终端设备向所述网络设备请求切换所述指示信息的类型。In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, before the network device generates a handover command, the method further includes: the network device receives a handover request from a terminal device; wherein the handover request is used by the terminal device to send the request to the network device. The network device requests to switch the type of the indication information.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述网络设备生成切换命令,包括:若所述网络设备判断所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,所述网络设备生成所述切换命令。In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the generating a handover command by the network device includes: if the network device determines that a service density between the terminal device and the network device meets a handover criterion, the network device generates The switching command.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述切换准则包括:In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the handover criterion includes:
若所述第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;If the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
若所述第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。If the first type of power saving signal is WUS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述网络设备生成切换命令,包括:所述网络设备判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换,所述网络设备生成所述切换命令;所述网络设备判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换,包括:对于终端设备所在小区内所有终端设备可使用不同类型的指示信息时,所述网络设备根据来自所述终端设备的所述切换请求,判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换;或者,对于终端设备所在小区内所有终端需要使用相同类型的指示信息时,所述网络设备根据来自所述终端设备所在小区内所有终端设备发送的切换请求的数量大于预设阈值,判断所述指示信息的类型可进行切换。In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the generating, by the network device, a switching command includes: the network device determines that the type of instruction information of the terminal device can be switched, and the network device generates the switching command; The network device may switch the type of the instruction information of the terminal device, including: when all types of instruction information are available to all terminal devices in a cell where the terminal device is located, the network device may A handover request to determine the type of instruction information of the terminal device; or, when all terminals in the cell where the terminal device is located need to use the same type of instruction information, the network device The number of handover requests sent by the terminal device is greater than a preset threshold, and it is determined that the type of the indication information can be handed over.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述切换命令包括:第二类型的指示信息;或者,所述切换命令包括:所述指示信息的类型切换指示。In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the switching command includes: a second type of instruction information; or, the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the instruction information.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述切换命令的形式为下行控制信息DCI、MAC CE或者承载与DCI、MAC CE、无线资源控制RRC信令中的任一种;In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the form of the handover command is any one of downlink control information DCI, MAC CE, or bearer and DCI, MAC CE, radio resource control RRC signaling;
或者,所述切换命令承载于系统信息中。Alternatively, the switching command is carried in system information.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述切换命令还包括:所述切换命令的持续时间。In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, the switching command further includes: a duration of the switching command.
在本申请第二方面一实施例中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述切换命令之后,还包括:In an embodiment of the second aspect of the present application, after the network device sends the handover command to the terminal device, the method further includes:
所述网络设备接收来自所述终端设备的切换确认信息;其中,所述切换确认信息用于向所述网络设备通知所述终端设备已根据所述切换命令确定所述第二类型的配置信息。The network device receives handover confirmation information from the terminal device; wherein the handover confirmation information is used to notify the network device that the terminal device has determined the second type of configuration information according to the handover command.
本申请第三方面提供一种终端设备,所述终端设备用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法。具体地,所述终端设备可以包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法的模块。A third aspect of the present application provides a terminal device, where the terminal device is configured to execute the foregoing first aspect or the communication method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. Specifically, the terminal device may include a module for executing the communication method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
本申请第四方面提供一种终端设备,所述终端设备包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器用于存储指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的指令,并且对所述存储器中存储的指令的执行使得所述处理器执行第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法。A fourth aspect of the present application provides a terminal device. The terminal device includes a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store instructions. The processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory. Execution of the instructions causes the processor to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
本申请第五方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述程序被处理器执行时实现第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法。A fifth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon a computer program that, when executed by a processor, implements the first aspect or a method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
本申请第六方面提供一种网络设备,所述网络设备用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法。具体地,所述网络设备可以包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法的模块。A sixth aspect of the present application provides a network device, where the network device is configured to execute the foregoing second aspect or the communication method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. Specifically, the network device may include a module for executing the communication method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
本申请第七方面提供一种网络设备,所述网络设备包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器用于存储指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的指令,并且对所述存储器中存储的指令的执行使得所述处理器执行第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法。A seventh aspect of the present application provides a network device. The network device includes a memory and a processor. The memory is configured to store instructions. The processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory, and Execution of the instructions causes the processor to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
本申请第八方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述程序被处理器执行时实现第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法。An eighth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon a computer program that, when executed by a processor, implements the second aspect or a method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1为本申请实施例所应用的通信系统一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system applied to an embodiment of this application; FIG.
图2为现有技术中DRX周期的结构示意图;2 is a schematic structural diagram of a DRX cycle in the prior art;
图3为现有技术中WUS的应用示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of an application of WUS in the prior art;
图4为现有技术中GTS的应用示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of an application of GTS in the prior art;
图5为本申请指示信息通信方法一实施例的流程示意图;5 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application;
图6为本申请指示信息通信方法一实施例的流程示意图;6 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application;
图7为本申请指示信息通信方法一实施例的流程示意图;7 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application;
图8为本申请终端设备一实施例的结构示意图;8 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device according to the present application;
图9为本申请终端设备一实施例的结构示意图;9 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device according to the present application;
图10为本申请网络设备一实施例的结构示意图;10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application;
图11为本申请网络设备一实施例的结构示意图;11 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图;13 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图。FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRM)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, a global mobile communication (GSM) system, a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, and a broadband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRM), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), Global Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, 5th generation in the future, 5G) system or new radio (NR).
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终 端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备可以是WLAN中的站点(station,ST),可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及下一代通信系统,例如,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)网络中的终端设备等。By way of example and not limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, Mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device. The terminal device can be a station (ST) in WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, and personal digital processing (personal digital assistant, PDA) devices, handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, and next-generation communication systems, such as terminal devices in 5G networks or Terminal equipment in a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN) network.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。By way of example and not limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. They are the general name for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a device that is worn directly on the body or is integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broad-spectrum wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, full or partial functions that do not rely on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on certain types of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical signs monitoring.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system. The IoT is an important part of the development of future information technology. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. It is connected to the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and physical interconnection.
在本申请实施例中,IOT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。例如,NB只包括一个资源块(resource block,RB),即,NB的带宽只有180KB。要做到海量接入,必须要求终端在接入上是离散的,根据本申请实施例的通信方法,能够有效解决IOT技术海量终端在通过NB接入网络时的拥塞问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the IOT technology may implement, for example, narrow band NB technology, to achieve mass connection, deep coverage, and terminal power saving. For example, the NB includes only one resource block (RB), that is, the bandwidth of the NB is only 180 KB. To achieve mass access, the terminals must be discrete in access. According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present application, the congestion problem of mass terminals of IOT technology when accessing the network through NB can be effectively solved.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备所发送的数据的接收方可以是例如,接入网设备,其中,接入网设备可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point,AP),GSM或CDMA中的基站(base transceiver station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA中的基站(NodeB,NB),或者是新型无线系统(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB,还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),或者中继站或接入点,或者车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的接入网设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的接入网设备等。In the embodiment of the present application, the receiver of the data sent by the terminal device may be, for example, an access network device, where the access network device may be an access point (AP) in WLAN, GSM or CDMA Base station (BTS) can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, or a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or an evolved base station in LTE (evolved (NodeB, eNB, or eNodeB), or a relay station or access point, or an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, and an access network device in a future 5G network or an access network device in a future evolved PLMN network.
另外,在本申请实施例中,接入网设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与接入网设备进行通信,该小区可以是接入网设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, an access network device provides services to a cell, and a terminal device communicates with the access network device through a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource) used by the cell. It may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a small cell. The small cell here may include: a metro cell, a micro cell ( micro cells, pico cells, femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
此外,LTE系统或5G系统中的载波上可以同时有多个小区同频工作,在某些特殊场景下,也可以认为上述载波与小区的概念等同。例如,在载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)场景下,当为UE配置辅载波时,会同时携带辅载波的载波索引和工作在该辅载波的辅小区的小区标识(cell identify,Cell ID),在这种情况下, 可以认为载波与小区的概念等同,比如UE接入一个载波和接入一个小区是等同的。In addition, multiple carriers on the carrier in the LTE system or 5G system can work on the same frequency at the same time. In some special scenarios, the above carrier and cell concepts can be considered equivalent. For example, in a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, when a secondary carrier is configured for a UE, the carrier index of the secondary carrier and the cell identity (Cell ID) of the secondary cell operating on the secondary carrier are carried at the same time. In this case, the concept of a carrier and a cell can be considered to be equal, for example, a UE accessing a carrier and accessing a cell are equivalent.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备所发送的数据的接收方可以是例如,接入网设备、核心网设备等,其中,核心网设备可以与多个接入网设备连接,用于控制接入网设备,并且,可以将从网络侧(例如,互联网)接收到的数据分发至接入网设备。In the embodiment of the present application, the receiver of the data sent by the terminal device may be, for example, an access network device, a core network device, etc., where the core network device may be connected to multiple access network devices for controlling access And can distribute the data received from the network side (for example, the Internet) to the access network device.
其中,以上列举的终端设备、接入网设备和核心网设备的功能和具体实现方式仅为示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此。The functions and specific implementations of the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network equipment listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and / or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" as used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and / or other machine-readable media used to store information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and / or carrying instruction (s) and / or data.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,在应用层可以运行多个应用程序,此情况下,执行本申请实施例的通信方法的应用程序与用于控制接收端设备完成所接收到的数据所对应的动作的应用程序可以是不同的应用程序。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, multiple application programs can be run at the application layer. In this case, the application program that executes the communication method of the embodiment of the present application and the method for controlling the receiving end device to complete the received data The application of the corresponding action may be a different application.
图1为本申请实施例所应用的通信系统一实施例的结构示意图。如图1所示的通信系统可以包括:至少一个网络设备,例如图1中的网络设备11、网络设备12和网络设备13;该通信系统还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1中的终端设备21。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system applied to an embodiment of the present application. The communication system shown in FIG. 1 may include: at least one network device, such as network device 11, network device 12, and network device 13 in FIG. 1; the communication system may further include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal in FIG. Equipment 21.
该无线通信系统100也可支持CoMP传输,即,多个小区或多个网络设备可以协同参与一个通信设备的数据传输或者联合接收一个通信设备发送的数据,或者多个小区或多个网络设备进行协作调度或者协作波束成型。其中,该多个小区可以属于相同的网络设备或者不同的网络设备,并且可以根据信道增益或路径损耗、接收信号强度、接收信号指令等来选择。The wireless communication system 100 can also support CoMP transmission, that is, multiple cells or multiple network devices can cooperate to participate in data transmission of a communication device or jointly receive data sent by a communication device, or multiple cells or multiple network devices can perform Cooperative scheduling or cooperative beamforming. The multiple cells may belong to the same network device or different network devices, and may be selected according to channel gain or path loss, received signal strength, received signal instruction, and the like.
可选地,图1示出的通信系统100中,网络设备11至网络设备13中的一个(例如网络设备#1)可以为服务网络设备,服务网络设备可以是指通过无线空口协议为通信设备提供无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)连接、非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS)移动性管理和安全性输入中至少一项服务的网络设备。可选地,网络设备12和网络设备13可以为协作网络设备。服务网络设备可以向通信设备发送控制信令,协作网络设备可以向通信设备发送数据;或者,服务网络设备可以向通信设备发送控制信令,服务网络设备和协作网络设备可以向通信设备发送数据;或者,服务网络设备和协作网络设备均可以向通信设备发送控制信令,并且服务网络设备和协作网络设备均可以向通信设备发送数据;或者,协作网络设备可以向通信设备发送控制信令,服务网络设备和协作网络设备中的至少一个可以向通信设备发送数据;或者,协作网络设备可以向通信设备发送控制信令和数据。本申请实施例对此并未特别限定。Optionally, in the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, one of the network device 11 to network device 13 (for example, network device # 1) may be a serving network device, and the serving network device may refer to a communication device through a wireless air interface protocol. Network equipment providing at least one of radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) connection, non-access stratum (NAS) mobility management, and security input services. Optionally, the network device 12 and the network device 13 may be cooperative network devices. The serving network device may send control signaling to the communication device, the cooperative network device may send data to the communication device; or, the serving network device may send control signaling to the communication device, and the serving network device and the cooperative network device may send data to the communication device; Alternatively, both the serving network device and the cooperative network device can send control signaling to the communication device, and both the serving network device and the cooperative network device can send data to the communication device; or, the cooperative network device can send control signaling to the communication device and service At least one of the network device and the cooperative network device may send data to the communication device; or, the cooperative network device may send control signaling and data to the communication device. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
应理解,图1中仅为便于理解,示意性地示出了网络设备11至网络设备13和通信设备,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定,该无线通信系统中还可以包括更多或更少 数量的网络设备,也可以包括更多数量的通信设备,与不同的通信设备通信的网络设备可以是相同的网络设备,也可以是不同的网络设备,与不同的通信设备通信的网络设备的数量可以相同,也可以不同,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that FIG. 1 is only for easy understanding, and schematically illustrates the network device 11 to the network device 13 and the communication device, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application, and the wireless communication system may also include more or more A small number of network devices can also include a larger number of communication devices. The network devices that communicate with different communication devices can be the same network device, or they can be different network devices, and network devices that communicate with different communication devices. The number may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
下面,以网络设备11和通信设备21为例简单说明,网络设备与通信设备之间的通信。In the following, the network device 11 and the communication device 21 are taken as examples to briefly explain the communication between the network device and the communication device.
网络设备11可包括1个天线或多个天线。另外,网络设备11可附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。The network device 11 may include one antenna or multiple antennas. In addition, the network device 11 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art may understand that each of them may include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (for example, a processor, a modulator, and a multiplexer). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
网络设备11可以与多个通信设备通信。通信设备21可以是例如蜂窝电话、智能电话、便携式电脑、手持通信设备、手持计算设备、卫星无线电装置、全球定位系统、PDA和/或用于在图1所示的通信系统上通信的任意其它适合设备。The network device 11 can communicate with a plurality of communication devices. The communication device 21 may be, for example, a cellular phone, a smart phone, a portable computer, a handheld communication device, a handheld computing device, a satellite radio, a global positioning system, a PDA, and / or any other device for communicating on the communication system shown in FIG. 1. Suitable for equipment.
如图1所示,通信设备21与网络设备11通信,其中,网络设备11通过前向链路(也称为下行链路)向通信设备21发送信息,并通过反向链路(也称为上行链路)网络设备11从通信设备21接收信息。As shown in FIG. 1, the communication device 21 communicates with a network device 11, where the network device 11 sends information to the communication device 21 through a forward link (also referred to as a downlink), and through a reverse link (also referred to as a Uplink) The network device 11 receives information from the communication device 21.
例如,在频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统中,例如,前向链路与反向链路使用不同的频带。For example, in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, for example, the forward link and the reverse link use different frequency bands.
再例如,在时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)系统和全双工(full duplex)系统中,前向链路和反向链路可使用共同频带。As another example, in a time division duplex (TDD) system and a full duplex (TDD) system, the forward link and the reverse link may use a common frequency band.
被设计用于通信的每个天线(或者由多个天线组成的天线组)和/或区域称为网络设备11的扇区。Each antenna (or antenna group consisting of multiple antennas) and / or area designed for communication is called a sector of the network device 11.
例如,可将天线组设计为与网络设备11覆盖区域的扇区中的通信设备通信。网络设备11可以通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向其对应的扇区内所有的通信设备发送信号。在网络设备11通过前向链路与通信设备21进行通信的过程中,网络设备11的发射天线也可利用波束成形来改善前向链路的信噪比。For example, the antenna group may be designed to communicate with a communication device in a sector covered by the network device 11. The network device 11 may send signals to all communication devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity. In the process that the network device 11 communicates with the communication device 21 through the forward link, the transmitting antenna of the network device 11 can also use beamforming to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the forward link.
此外,与网络设备11通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向它所有的通信设备发送信号的方式相比,在网络设备11利用波束成形向相关覆盖区域中随机分散的通信设备21发送信号时,相邻小区中的移动设备会受到较少的干扰。In addition, compared with the way in which the network device 11 sends signals to all its communication devices through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity, when the network device 11 uses beamforming to send signals to the communication devices 21 randomly dispersed in the relevant coverage area, the phase Mobile devices in neighboring cells experience less interference.
在给定时间,网络设备11、通信设备21可以是无线通信发送装置和/或无线通信接收装置。当发送数据时,无线通信发送装置可对数据进行编码以用于传输。具体地,无线通信发送装置可获取(例如生成、从其它通信设备接收、或在存储器中保存等)要通过信道发送至无线通信接收装置的一定数目的数据比特。这种数据比特可包含在数据的传输块(或多个传输块)中,传输块可被分段以产生多个码块。At a given time, the network device 11 and the communication device 21 may be a wireless communication transmitting apparatus and / or a wireless communication receiving apparatus. When transmitting data, the wireless communication transmitting device may encode the data for transmission. Specifically, the wireless communication transmitting device may obtain (for example, generate, receive from another communication device, or save in a memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted to the wireless communication receiving device through a channel. Such data bits may be contained in a transport block (or transport blocks) of data, which may be segmented to generate multiple code blocks.
此外,如图1所示的通信系统可以是PLMN网络、D2D网络、M2M网络、IoT网络或者其他网络,图1只是举例的简化示意图,网络中还可以包括其他网络设备或通信设备,图1中未予以画出。In addition, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 may be a PLMN network, a D2D network, an M2M network, an IoT network, or other networks. FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example. The network may also include other network devices or communication devices. Not drawn.
为便于理解,在介绍本申请指示信息通信方法及装置之前,下面结合图2、图3和图4将描述本申请实施例中所涉及的相关术语及其原理。In order to facilitate understanding, before introducing the information communication method and apparatus of the present application, the related terms and principles involved in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to FIGS. 2, 3 and 4.
图2为现有技术中DRX周期的结构示意图。如图2所示,非连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)通信中一种用于减少终 端设备功耗的技术,由网络设备为处在连接态、空闲态以及非激活态的终端设备配置DRX功能。例如,如图2所示,对于配置了DRX功能的终端设备,在每个DRX周期中,终端设备在每个DRX周期前一部分的激活时间(On-Duration)处于激活状态,监听物理下行共享信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH);而在DRX周期激活时间后的休眠时间进入休眠状态,不进行PDCCH的监听。同时,网络设备会保证在终端设备的DRX周期中的激活时间向该终端设备发送PDCCH。具体地,DRX技术在LTE中DRX功能控制实体位于协议栈的MAC层,其主要功能是控制向物理层发送指令,通知物理层在特定的时间监听PDCCH即处于激活期,其余时间不会开启接收天线,终端设备处在休眠状态。从而使得终端设备不会一直处在监听PDCCH的状态,而达到节省终端设备耗电量、改善续航能力的目的,以提升终端设备的用户体验。FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a DRX cycle in the prior art. As shown in Figure 2, discontinuous reception (DRX) is a technology used to reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment in long-term evolution (LTE) communications. The network equipment is in the connected state and idle state. And inactive terminal equipment is configured with DRX function. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, for a terminal device configured with a DRX function, in each DRX cycle, the terminal device is in an activated state (On-Duration) at the previous part of each DRX cycle, and monitors the physical downlink shared channel. (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH); and the sleep time after the DRX cycle activation time enters the sleep state, and no PDCCH monitoring is performed. At the same time, the network device will ensure that the PDCCH is sent to the terminal device at the activation time in the DRX cycle of the terminal device. Specifically, DRX technology in LTE. The DRX function control entity is located at the MAC layer of the protocol stack. Its main function is to control the sending of instructions to the physical layer to notify the physical layer that listening to the PDCCH at a specific time is in the active period, and the reception will not be turned on for the rest of the time. Antenna, terminal equipment is in sleep state. As a result, the terminal device will not be in the state of monitoring the PDCCH all the time, and the purpose of saving power consumption and improving battery life of the terminal device is achieved, thereby improving the user experience of the terminal device.
而在新空口(new radio,NR)系统中,由于高速数据传输业务的比重增加并且最高速率提升明显,因此终端设备与网络设备之间通信的数据可能以突发的形式产生并在短时间内完成。为了进一步地提升终端设备的性能,NR中可能会在DRX基础上提供额外的指示信息(需要说明的是,本申请中所有所述的指示信息也可被称为终端功率节省信号(UE power saving signal,UPSS),二者等同)的机制,终端设备需要根据所获取的指示信息确定终端在每一DRX周期内是否执行DRX机制,即根据指示信息确定是否在指示信息对应的DRX周期的激活时间处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或接收物理下行共享信道(Physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)。使得网络设备能够在确定某一DRX周期的激活时间内存在PDCCH时,才通过指示信息将终端设备在该DRX周期内的激活时间进行唤醒并处于激活状态以监听PDCCH,否则终端设备一直处于休眠状态,以进一步节省终端设备的耗电量。其中,两种常见类型的指示信息包括:唤醒信号(wake up signal,WUS)和休眠信号(go-to-sleep signal,GTS),下面分别进行说明。In a new radio (NR) system, because the proportion of high-speed data transmission services increases and the maximum rate increases significantly, the data communicated between terminal equipment and network equipment may be generated in a burst and in a short time carry out. In order to further improve the performance of terminal equipment, NR may provide additional indication information on the basis of DRX (It should be noted that all the indication information in this application can also be referred to as a terminal power saving signal (UE power saving signal signal, UPSS), the two are the same) mechanism, the terminal device needs to determine whether the terminal executes the DRX mechanism in each DRX cycle according to the acquired instruction information, that is, whether to activate the DRX cycle corresponding to the instruction information according to the instruction information It is in an active state and monitors the PDCCH or receives a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). Enables the network device to wake up the terminal device at the activation time in the DRX cycle and to be in the activated state to monitor the PDCCH when it is determined that the PDCCH exists in the activation time of a DRX cycle, otherwise the terminal device is always in a sleep state To further save power consumption of terminal equipment. Among them, two common types of indication information include: a wake-up signal (WUS) and a go-to-sleep signal (GTS), which are respectively described below.
当指示信息是WUS,指示信息用于指示终端是否监测PDCCH,或者指示终端监测PDCCH;或者,指示信息用于指示终端是否接收PDSCH,或者指示终端接收PDSCH。具体地,在WUS的机制中,终端设备如果收到DRX周期对应的WUS信号,则在该DRX周期处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或者接收PDSCH;终端设备如果没有收到DRX周期对应的WUS信号,则在该DRX周期处于休眠状态不去监听PDCCH或者不接收PDSCH。可选地,指示信息可以在对应的DRX周期的激活时间前发送或者在对应的DRX周期的激活时间期间发送,对于处于RRC空闲态的终端设备,指示信息DRX周期之前发送;对于处于RRC连接态且配置了DRX功能的终端设备,指示信息可以在DRX周期之前发送或者在DRX周期的激活时间期间发送。并且网络设备在向终端设备发送指示信息时,并不是在每个DRX周期都向终端设备发送指示信息,而是根据业务的到达情况、业务时延要求等策略来决定是否发送指示信息。因此,终端设备在网络设备指示的DRX提前时长有可能监测到网络设备向其他终端设备发送的指示信息,则终端设备可以以码分的方式区分不同终端设备的指示信息。并且终端设备在接收指示信息时仅需开启终端设备中与指示信息对应的部分接收电路且监听时间较短。When the indication information is WUS, the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal monitors the PDCCH, or the terminal is monitored to monitor the PDCCH; or, the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal receives the PDSCH, or instruct the terminal to receive the PDSCH. Specifically, in the WUS mechanism, if a terminal device receives a WUS signal corresponding to a DRX cycle, it is activated in the DRX cycle and monitors the PDCCH or receives a PDSCH; if the terminal device does not receive a WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, Do not listen to the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH in the sleep state during the DRX cycle. Optionally, the indication information may be sent before the activation time of the corresponding DRX cycle or during the activation time of the corresponding DRX cycle. For the terminal device in the RRC idle state, the indication information is sent before the DRX cycle; for the terminal device in the RRC connected state, And for the terminal device configured with the DRX function, the indication information can be sent before the DRX cycle or during the activation time of the DRX cycle. In addition, when the network device sends the instruction information to the terminal device, it does not send the instruction information to the terminal device every DRX cycle, but decides whether to send the instruction information according to the policies such as the service arrival situation and service delay requirements. Therefore, it is possible for the terminal device to detect the indication information sent by the network device to other terminal devices in advance of the DRX time indicated by the network device, and then the terminal device can distinguish the instruction information of different terminal devices in a code division manner. In addition, when receiving the instruction information, the terminal device only needs to enable a part of the receiving circuit corresponding to the instruction information in the terminal device, and the monitoring time is short.
例如,图3为现有技术中WUS的应用示意图,其中以指示信息为WUS且指示信息在DRX周期的DRX周期前发送为示例进行说明,DRX周期的激活时间与接收WUS指示 信息之间的时间差记为提前时长GAP,网络设备和终端设备提前配置在特定的提前时长GAP时,网络设备在DRX周期的提前时长向终端设备发送指示信息、终端设备在DRX周期的提前时长接收终端设备发送的指示信息。如图3所示,若网络设备确定终端设备在DRX周期①存在该终端设备或多个终端设备调度的PDCCH或PDSCH时,在该DRX周期①之前的提前时长向终端设备发送WUS指示唤醒终端设备,终端设备在接收到WUS后,在该WUS后对应的DRX周期①内的激活时间处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或PDSCH。若网络设备确定终端设备在DRX周期②不存在该终端设备或多个终端设备调度的PDCCH或PDSCH时,则在该DRX周期②之前的提前时长不向终端设备发送WUS,终端设备在DRX周期②之前未收到WUS,则终端设备在DRX周期②的整个周期都处于休眠状态。需要说明的是,如图3中的各种信号的高度仅用于表征各种信号监测的相对电流或功率大小。For example, FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the application of WUS in the prior art, where the instruction information is WUS and the instruction information is sent before the DRX cycle of the DRX cycle as an example for illustration. The time difference between the activation time of the DRX cycle and the reception of the WUS instruction information It is recorded as GAP in advance. When the network device and terminal device are configured in advance at a specific GAP in advance, the network device sends instruction information to the terminal device in the advance time of the DRX cycle, and the terminal device receives the instruction sent by the terminal device in the advance time of the DRX cycle. information. As shown in FIG. 3, if a network device determines that a terminal device has a PDCCH or a PDSCH scheduled by the terminal device or multiple terminal devices in the DRX cycle ①, a WUS instruction is sent to the terminal device in advance of the DRX cycle ① to wake up the terminal device. After receiving the WUS, the terminal device is in the active state within the DRX cycle ① corresponding to the WUS and is monitoring the PDCCH or PDSCH. If the network device determines that the terminal device does not have a PDCCH or PDSCH scheduled by the terminal device or multiple terminal devices in the DRX cycle ②, the WUS is not sent to the terminal device in advance before the DRX cycle ②, and the terminal device is in the DRX cycle ② If no WUS has been received before, the terminal device is in the sleep state for the entire period of the DRX cycle ②. It should be noted that the heights of the various signals as shown in FIG. 3 are only used to characterize the relative currents or power levels monitored by the various signals.
当指示信息是GTS,指示信息用于指示终端是否监测PDCCH,或者指示终端不监测PDCCH;或者,指示信息用于指示终端是否接收PDSCH,或者指示终端不接收PDSCH。具体地,在GTS的机制中,终端设备如果收到DRX对应的GTS信号,则在该DRX周期处于休眠状态不去监听PDCCH或者不接收PDSCH;终端设备如果没有收到DRX周期对应的WUS信号,则在该DRX周期处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或者接收PDSCH。When the indication information is GTS, the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal monitors the PDCCH or the terminal does not monitor the PDCCH; or the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal receives the PDSCH or the terminal does not receive the PDSCH. Specifically, in the GTS mechanism, if a terminal device receives a GTS signal corresponding to a DRX, it does not listen to the PDCCH or receive a PDSCH during the DRX cycle; if the terminal device does not receive a WUS signal corresponding to the DRX cycle, Then it is in the active state in this DRX cycle and monitors the PDCCH or receives the PDSCH.
例如,图4为现有技术中GTS的应用示意图,其中同样以指示信息在DRX周期的DRX周期前发送为示例进行说明,其中的指示信息为GTS。DRX周期的激活时间与接收GTS指示信息之间的时间差记为提前时长GAP,网络设备和终端设备提前配置在特定的提前时长GAP时,网络设备在DRX周期的提前时长向终端设备发送指示信息、终端设备在DRX周期的提前时长接收终端设备发送的指示信息。如图4所示,若网络设备确定终端设备在DRX周期③不存在该终端设备或多个终端设备调度的PDCCH或PDSCH时,在该DRX周期③之前的提前时长向终端设备发送GTS,当终端设备接收到GTS,则终端设备在该GTS对应的DRX周期③的整个周期都处于休眠状态。若网络设备确定终端设备在DRX周期④存在该终端设备或多个终端设备调度的PDCCH或PDSCH时,则在该DRX周期④之前的提前时长不向终端设备发送GTS,终端设备在DRX周期④之前未收到GTS,则终端设备在DRX周期④内的激活时间处于激活状态并监听PDCCH或PDSCH。需要说明的是,如图4中的各种信号的高度同样仅用于表征各种信号监测的相对电流或功率大小。For example, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the application of GTS in the prior art, and the same description is given by using an example in which the indication information is sent before the DRX cycle of the DRX cycle, where the indication information is GTS. The time difference between the activation time of the DRX cycle and the reception of the GTS indication information is recorded as the GAP in advance. When the network equipment and the terminal equipment are configured in advance with a specific GAP in advance, the network equipment sends instruction information to the terminal equipment in the advance time of the DRX cycle. The terminal device receives the indication information sent by the terminal device in advance of the DRX cycle. As shown in FIG. 4, if the network device determines that the terminal device does not exist in the DRX cycle ③ or the PDCCH or PDSCH scheduled by the terminal device or multiple terminal devices, the GTS sends the GTS to the terminal device in advance before the DRX cycle ③. When the device receives the GTS, the terminal device is in a sleep state for the entire period of the DRX cycle ③ corresponding to the GTS. If the network device determines that the terminal device has a PDCCH or PDSCH scheduled by the terminal device or multiple terminal devices during the DRX cycle ④, the GTS is not sent to the terminal device in advance before the DRX cycle ④, and the terminal device is before the DRX cycle ④ If the GTS is not received, the activation time of the terminal device during the DRX cycle ④ is in the active state and the PDCCH or PDSCH is monitored. It should be noted that the heights of various signals as shown in FIG. 4 are also only used to characterize the relative current or power magnitude of various signal monitoring.
虽然现有技术中,通过指示信息例如WUS和GTS的使用,能够使得网络设备能够在确定某一DRX周期的激活时间内存在某个或多个终端设备的PDCCH或PDSCH时,才通过指示信息将该终端设备在该DRX周期内的激活时间进行唤醒,并使得该终端设备保持激活状态以在激活时间内监听PDCCH或接收PDSCH,否则终端设备一直处于休眠状态即使在整个DRX周期中,从而在一定程度上节省了终端设备的耗电量。但是,在现有技术中的终端设备在使用指示信息时,只能在WUS于GTS中择一使用,网络设备只会为终端设备配置WUS机制或者GTS机制中的一种,并且对于每个终端具体配置哪一种指示信息也并没有一种明确的判断依据。Although in the prior art, the use of instruction information such as WUS and GTS can enable network devices to determine the existence of PDCCH or PDSCH of one or more terminal devices within the activation time of a certain DRX cycle. The terminal device wakes up during the activation time in the DRX cycle, and keeps the terminal device active to monitor the PDCCH or receive PDSCH within the activation time, otherwise the terminal device is always in a sleep state even during the entire DRX cycle, and therefore in a certain period The power consumption of the terminal equipment is saved to a certain extent. However, in the prior art, when the terminal device uses the instruction information, it can only be used in WUS or GTS. The network device only configures one of the WUS mechanism or the GTS mechanism for the terminal device, and for each terminal There is no clear basis for judging which kind of indication information is specifically configured.
这样,对于配置了WUS机制的终端设备,网络设备在每个需要监测PDCCH或接收PDSCH的DRX周期前需要向对应的终端设备发送指示信息WUS,以使对应的终端设备对 指示信息进行处理并在DRX周期的激活时间处于激活状态。一旦配置了WUS机制的终端设备如果业务较为频繁,终端设备在每个DRX周期前都还需要额外再接收并处理一个WUS的指示信息,不仅没有节省终端设备的耗电量,还因为频繁进行指示信息的接收和处理增加了终端设备的耗电量。而对于配置了GTS机制的终端设备,网络设备只有在不需要监听PDCCH和接收PDSCH的DRX周期前才会向终端设备发送指示信息GTS,一旦配置了GTS机制的终端设备如果业务不频繁,每个DRX周期前处于休眠模式的终端设备还需要接收并处理一个GTS的指示信息,同样对于终端设备的耗电量的节省程度有限。因此,如何克服当前功率节省信号应用时的前述问题,是目前亟待解决的技术问题。In this way, for a terminal device configured with the WUS mechanism, the network device needs to send the instruction information WUS to the corresponding terminal device before each DRX cycle that needs to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH, so that the corresponding terminal device processes the instruction information and The activation time of the DRX cycle is active. Once a terminal device configured with the WUS mechanism has frequent services, the terminal device needs to receive and process an additional WUS instruction message before each DRX cycle. This not only does not save the power consumption of the terminal device, but also provides frequent instructions. The reception and processing of information increases the power consumption of the terminal equipment. For a terminal device configured with the GTS mechanism, the network device will only send an instruction GTS to the terminal device before it needs to monitor the PDCCH and receive the DRX cycle of the PDSCH. Once the terminal device configured with the GTS mechanism is infrequent, each The terminal device in the sleep mode before the DRX cycle also needs to receive and process a GTS indication message, and similarly, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved to a limited extent. Therefore, how to overcome the aforementioned problems in the current application of power-saving signals is a technical problem to be solved urgently at present.
因此,本申请通过提供一种指示信息的通信方法,以在满足指示信息的切换条件时,网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,当终端设备使该切换命令生效后,网络设备和终端设备二者之间使用另一类型指示信息,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景和业务的动态变化,并进一步降低终端设备的耗电量和通信开销。Therefore, the present application provides a communication method of indication information, so that when a switching condition of the indication information is satisfied, the network device sends a switching command to the terminal device. After the terminal device makes the switching command effective, both the network device and the terminal device Another type of indication information is used between them to meet different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例中指示信息通信方法进行具体说明。The instruction information communication method in the embodiment of the present application will be specifically described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
图5为本申请指示信息通信方法一实施例的流程示意图。如图5所示的实施例可在如图1所示的通信系统中执行,如图5所示的指示信息通信方法包括:FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application. The embodiment shown in FIG. 5 can be executed in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method for communicating instruction information shown in FIG. 5 includes:
S101:网络设备生成切换命令,其中,切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型。S101: The network device generates a switching command, where the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type.
具体地,在S101中,当网络设备确定终端设备的指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型时,则生成切换命令,用于指示终端设备的指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型。需要说明的是,S101之前的终端设备所使用的指示信息的类型为第一类型,即终端设备是根据监测第一类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤。而网络设备在某确定终端设备的指示信息的类型需要进行切换后,生成切换命令并发送至该终端设备,以指示该终端设备切换指示信息的类型,使得终端设备将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型,并根据第二类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤。本实施例所述的监听步骤可以是:终端设备根据是否接收到来自网络设备的指示信息,确定是否监测物理下行控制信道PDCCH,或监测PDCCH,或不监测PDCCH;或者,确定是否接收物理下行共享信道PDSCH,或接收PDSCH,或不接收PDSCH。Specifically, in S101, when the network device determines that the type of the indication information of the terminal device is switched from the first type to the second type, it generates a switching command for instructing the type of the indication information of the terminal device to be switched from the first type to The second type. It should be noted that the type of the instruction information used by the terminal device before S101 is the first type, that is, the terminal device determines whether to perform the monitoring step according to monitoring the first type of instruction information. After a network device determines that the type of instruction information of a terminal device needs to be switched, a network device generates a switch command and sends it to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device to switch the type of instruction information, so that the terminal device changes the type of instruction information from the first The type is switched to the second type, and whether to perform the monitoring step is determined according to the instruction information of the second type. The monitoring step described in this embodiment may be: the terminal device determines whether to monitor the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, or monitors the PDCCH, or does not monitor the PDCCH according to whether the terminal device receives the instruction information from the network device; or determines whether to receive the physical downlink sharing Channel PDSCH, or receive PDSCH, or not receive PDSCH.
可选地,本实施例所述的指示信息的类型至少包括:休眠信号GTS和唤醒信号WUS,并且第一类型与第二类型不同。则进一步可选地,若第一类型的指示信息为GTS,则第二类型的指示信息为WUS;若第一类型的指示信息为WUS,则第二类型的指示信息为GTS。Optionally, the types of the indication information in this embodiment include at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS, and the first type is different from the second type. Then further optionally, if the first type of indication information is GTS, the second type of indication information is WUS; if the first type of indication information is WUS, the second type of indication information is GTS.
可选地,本实施例中网络设备所生成的切换命令一种可能的表示形式为,切换命令用于表示某一类型的指示信息,或者切换命令通过携带的一个或多个参数用于表示某一类型的指示信息,例如:规定切换命令中的一个特定的比特位用于表示指示信息的类型,当切换命令的该比特位为“0”时,切换命令用于指示将指示信息的类型切换为第一类型;或者当切换命令的该比特位为“1”时,切换命令用于指示将指示信息的类型切换为第二类型。则例如在本实施例的S101中,切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型,则切换命令的特定比特位的取值为“1”。Optionally, a possible representation form of the handover command generated by the network device in this embodiment is that the handover command is used to represent a certain type of indication information, or the handover command is used to represent a certain type by using one or more parameters carried by the handover command. A type of instruction information, for example, a specific bit in a switching command is specified to indicate the type of the instruction information. When the bit of the switching command is "0", the switching command is used to instruct the type of the instruction information to be switched Is the first type; or when the bit of the switching command is "1", the switching command is used to instruct to switch the type of the indication information to the second type. For example, in S101 of this embodiment, the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type, and then the value of the specific bit of the switching command is "1".
或者,本实施例中网络设备所生成的切换命令另一种可能的表示形式为,切换命令中包括指示信息的类型切换指示,但是不包括指示信息的类型。即网络设备通过该切换命令仅用于告知终端设备是否需要切换指示信息的类型,当需要进行指示信息的类型的切换时,具体由终端设备来确定将指示信息的类型由第一类型为第二类型。例如:规定切换命令为“1”时用于指示终端设备切换指示信息的类型,切换命令为“0”时用于指示终端设备不切换指示信息的类型。或者,也可以仅规定切换命令为“1”时用于指示终端设备切换指示信息的类型,终端设备收到的切换命令为“1”时确定切换指示信息的类型,收到其他取值的切换命令或者未收到切换命令时,终端不进行指示信息类型的切换。终端设备收到该切换命令后,由终端设备执行具体的指示信息的切换。这里仅对切换命令表示形式进行说明,终端设备具体根据切换命令确定切换的第二类型的指示信息,将在本申请后续实施例的S103中进行说明。Alternatively, another possible representation form of the handover command generated by the network device in this embodiment is that the handover command includes a type switching instruction of the instruction information, but does not include the type of the instruction information. That is, the network device only uses the switch command to inform the terminal device whether the type of instruction information needs to be switched. When the type of instruction information needs to be switched, the terminal device determines the type of the instruction information from the first type to the second. Types of. For example, when the switching command is "1", it is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the type of instruction information, and when the switching command is "0", it is used to instruct the terminal device not to switch the type of instruction information. Alternatively, only the type of the switching instruction information used to instruct the terminal device when the switching command is "1" may be specified, and the type of the switching instruction information is determined when the switching command received by the terminal device is "1", and other valued switching is received When a command is not received or a switch command is not received, the terminal does not switch the type of the indication information. After the terminal device receives the switching command, the terminal device performs the switching of the specific instruction information. Here, only the representation form of the handover command is described. The terminal device specifically determines the second type of indication information of the handover according to the handover command, which will be described in S103 in the subsequent embodiment of the present application.
S102:网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令;则终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令。S102: The network device sends a handover command to the terminal device; then the terminal device receives the handover command from the network device.
具体地,在S102中,网络设备将S101中生成的切换命令发送至终端设备,相应地,终端设备则接收来自网络设备所发送的该切换命令。Specifically, in S102, the network device sends the handover command generated in S101 to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device receives the handover command sent from the network device.
可选地,网络设备可以将切换命令采用如下形式向终端设备发送:下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)、MAC CE,或者承载于DCI、MAC CE、无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令中,或者承载于系统信息中。Optionally, the network device may send the handover command to the terminal device in the following form: downlink control information (DCI), MAC CE, or carried in DCI, MAC CE, radio resource control (RRC) In signaling or in system information.
其中,对于终端设备所在小区内所有的终端设备所使用的指示信息类型相同时,如果小区内一个终端设备的指示信息的类型发生切换,小区内其他的终端设备的指示信息的类型也需要进行相应的切换。则网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令时,一种可能的方式是,将切换命令承载在系统信息中以广播的形式向终端设备所在小区内所有的终端设备,当小区内所有的终端设备接收到系统信息后,所有终端设备均根据承载在系统信息中的切换命令进行指示信息类型的切换。需要说明的是,这里的系统信息可以是终端设备与网络设备之间通信的任一现有的系统信息,或新的系统信息。切换命令可以由系统信息中一个或者多个特定比特位、或者空闲的比特位承载。例如,切换命令用于指示终端设备的类型进行切换时对应的一个比特位的值为“1”或者对应的多个比特位的值为“10”,当切换命令用于终端设备的指示信息的类型不需进行切换时对应的一个比特位的值为“0”或者对应的多个比特位的值为“01”;又例如:切换命令还可以通过多个比特位来指示终端设备的指示信息切换的多个类型,如果终端设备可配置四种类型的指示信息,则切换命令可分别通过“00”,“01”,“10”和“11”来指示终端设备切换为一一对应的四种类型的指示信息。When the types of instruction information used by all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located are the same, if the type of instruction information of one terminal device in the cell is switched, the types of instruction information of other terminal devices in the cell need to be correspondingly changed. Switch. When the network device sends a handover command to the terminal device, one possible way is to bear the handover command in the system information to broadcast to all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located. When all the terminal devices in the cell receive the After the system information, all terminal devices switch the type of instruction information according to the switch command carried in the system information. It should be noted that the system information here may be any existing system information or new system information communicated between the terminal device and the network device. The switching command may be carried by one or more specific bits or idle bits in the system information. For example, the switch command is used to indicate that when the type of the terminal device is switched, the corresponding bit value is "1" or the corresponding multiple bit values are "10". When the switch command is used for the indication information of the terminal device, When the type does not need to be switched, the corresponding one bit value is "0" or the corresponding multiple bit values are "01"; for example, the switching command may also indicate the terminal device's indication information through multiple bits. There are multiple types of switching. If the terminal device can be configured with four types of indication information, the switching command can instruct the terminal device to switch to a one-to-one corresponding four through "00", "01", "10", and "11" respectively. Types of instructions.
而对于终端设备所在小区内各终端设备所采用的指示信息的类型不用保持一致即有可能不完全相同时,网络设备向终端设备发送的切换命令可通过专门设置的物理层信号或者现有的物理层信号DCI、专门设置的或者现有的MAC CE来指示切换命令,或者,将切换命令承载在现有的或新的DCI、MAC CE或者RRC信令中的某一特定比特位。例如:切换命令可以通过MAC CE中一个或者多个特定的比特位承载。对于一个特定的比特位,切换命令用于指示终端的指示信息的类型进行切换时MAC CE中该比特位的值为“1”,切换命令用于指示终端的指示信息的类型不需进行切换时MAC CE中该比特 位的值为“0”又例如:切换命令可通过多个特定的比特位来指示终端设备的指示信息切换的类型,如果终端设备可配置四种类型的指示信息,则切换命令可分别通过“00”,“01”,“10”和“11”来指示终端设备切换为对应类型的指示信息。When the types of instruction information used by terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located do not need to be consistent or may not be the same, the handover command sent by the network device to the terminal device can be through a specially set physical layer signal or an existing physical The layer signal DCI, a specially set or existing MAC CE indicates the handover command, or the handover command is carried in a specific bit in the existing or new DCI, MAC CE or RRC signaling. For example, the handover command may be carried by one or more specific bits in the MAC CE. For a specific bit, the handover command is used to indicate the type of instruction information of the terminal when the bit value in the MAC CE is "1", and the handover command is used to indicate that the type of instruction information of the terminal does not need to be switched In MAC CE, the value of this bit is "0". For example, the switch command can indicate the type of the switching information of the terminal device through multiple specific bits. If the terminal device can be configured with four types of indicating information, the switching is The command can instruct the terminal device to switch to the corresponding type of instruction information through "00", "01", "10", and "11", respectively.
S103:终端设备根据切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息。S103: The terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the switching command.
具体地,在S103中终端设备对S102中所收到的切换命令进行处理,终端设备根据切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息。其中,由于在S101之前终端设备通过监测第一类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤,而S102接收到的切换命令是用于指示终端设备切换指示信息的类型,切换为通过监测第二类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤,因此,S103可以理解为终端设备生效来自网络设备的切换命令,即终端设备对于监测第二类型的指示信息进行的配置以实现指示信息的切换,或更为具体地将监测第一类型的配置信息修改/切换为第二类型的配置信息。Specifically, in S103, the terminal device processes the handover command received in S102, and the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the handover command. Among them, before S101, the terminal device determines whether to perform the monitoring step by monitoring the first type of instruction information, and the switching command received in S102 is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the type of the instruction information, and it is switched to monitoring the second type of instruction The information determines whether to perform the monitoring step. Therefore, S103 can be understood as that the terminal device takes effect the switch command from the network device, that is, the terminal device configures the monitoring of the second type of instruction information to implement the instruction information switching, or more specifically Monitor the first type of configuration information to modify / switch to the second type of configuration information.
可选地,终端设备可以提前配置/存储不同类型的指示信息对应的不同的配置信息,当收到切换命令,终端设备可以根据切换命令指示的类型,直接选择执行已配置好的对应类型的配置信息或者从存储空间中获取存储的对应类型的配置信息并进行配置。Optionally, the terminal device may configure / store different configuration information corresponding to different types of indication information in advance. When receiving the switching command, the terminal device may directly select and execute the configured corresponding type of configuration according to the type indicated by the switching command. Information or obtain corresponding configuration information stored in the storage space and perform configuration.
可选地,本实施例中确定第二类型的配置信息至少包括如下步骤:若终端设备判断终端设备监测第一类型的指示信息与第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路不同,则终端设备将用于监测第一类型的指示信息的检测电路切换为用于监测第二类型的指示信息的监测电路;和/或,若终端设备判断终端设备监测第一类型的指示信息与第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测位置不同,则终端设备将第一类型的指示信息的监测位置切换为第二类型的指示信息的监测位置。Optionally, determining the second type of configuration information in this embodiment includes at least the following steps: If the terminal device determines that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the monitoring circuit used by the second type of instruction information is different, the terminal device Switching the detection circuit for monitoring the first type of instruction information to a monitoring circuit for monitoring the second type of instruction information; and / or, if the terminal device determines that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information The monitoring locations used by the instruction information are different, and the terminal device switches the monitoring location of the first type of instruction information to the monitoring location of the second type of instruction information.
具体地,由于不同类型的指示信息有可能信号设计不同,造成了终端设备在接收不同类型的指示信息时所使用的检测电路或者接收位置不同,则在本步骤中,终端设备在配置第二类型的配置信息时,需要将第一类型的指示信息与第二类型的指示信息进行对比。如果第一类型的指示信息和第二类型的指示信息的信号设计相同,或者终端设备接收第一类型的指示信息和第二类型的指示信息所使用的相关配置信息相同,则可以将终端在之前监测第一类型的指示信息时所使用的第一类型的配置信息,直接作为第二类型的配置信息,不需要更改终端设备已有的配置信息。相反地,如果终端设备判断第一类型的指示信息和第二类型指示信息的信号设计不同,就需要更改相关指示信息的配置信息。其中,如果用于监测第一类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路与用于监测第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路不同,则需要在本步骤中调整终端设备的监测电路为第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路。又如果终端设备用于接收第一类型的指示信息的接收位置与接收第二类型的指示信息的接收位置不同,则需要在本步骤中调整终端设备的指示信息的接收位置为第二类型的指示信息的接收位置。例如,这里的接收位置可以是终端设备接收指示信息的时域位置、频域位置或者时频位置。此外,如果终端设备判断第一类型的指示信息和第二类型指示信息的信号设计不同,还可以将第一类型的指示信息的配置信息更改为第二类型的指示信息的配置信息,这里的配置信息还可以是指示信息的加扰方式或者指示信息的加密解密方式等。Specifically, because different types of instruction information may have different signal designs, which causes terminal devices to use different detection circuits or receive locations when receiving different types of instruction information, in this step, the terminal device is configured with the second type. When configuring the configuration information, the first type of instruction information needs to be compared with the second type of instruction information. If the signal design of the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are the same, or the terminal device receives the same configuration information used by the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information, the terminal may be placed before The first type of configuration information used when monitoring the first type of instruction information is directly used as the second type of configuration information, and there is no need to change the existing configuration information of the terminal device. Conversely, if the terminal device determines that the signal design of the first type of indication information and the second type of indication information are different, it is necessary to change the configuration information of the related indication information. Wherein, if the monitoring circuit used for monitoring the first type of instruction information is different from the monitoring circuit used for monitoring the second type of instruction information, it is necessary to adjust the monitoring circuit of the terminal device to the second type in this step. Instructions for the monitoring circuit used. If the receiving location of the terminal device for receiving the first type of instruction information is different from the receiving location of the second type of instruction information, in this step, it is necessary to adjust the receiving location of the terminal device's instruction information to the second type of instruction. Where the message was received. For example, the receiving location here may be a time domain location, a frequency domain location, or a time-frequency location where the terminal device receives the indication information. In addition, if the terminal device determines that the signal design of the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are different, the configuration information of the first type of instruction information may also be changed to the configuration information of the second type of instruction information. The information may also be a scrambling mode of the indication information or an encryption and decryption mode of the indication information.
可选地,在S102之后,S103之前,还包括:终端设备启动预设时间的定时器;并在定时器超时后执行S103。具体地,终端设备可以根据终端设备的业务到达情况、业 务时延要求或者终端设备的其他策略,在收到切换命令后并不立即执行,而是开启预设时间的定时器,这里的预设时间可以由终端设备或者网络设备根据业务需求进行调整,以满足不同业务的需求。当定时器超时后,终端设备再执行S103中的配置第二类型的配置信息。在定时器超时前,终端设备还是维持收到切换命令前的第一类型的指示信息的第一类型的配置信息,并通过第一类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤;在定时器超时后再确定第二类型的配置信息,并通过第二类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤。Optionally, after S102 and before S103, the method further includes: the terminal device starts a timer for a preset time; and executes S103 after the timer expires. Specifically, the terminal device may not execute immediately after receiving the handover command according to the service arrival situation of the terminal device, service delay requirements, or other policies of the terminal device, but may start a timer of a preset time, the preset here The time can be adjusted by terminal equipment or network equipment according to business needs to meet the needs of different services. When the timer expires, the terminal device performs the configuration of the second type of configuration information in S103 again. Before the timer expires, the terminal device still maintains the first type of configuration information of the first type of instruction information before receiving the handover command, and determines whether to perform the monitoring step by using the first type of instruction information; Determine the second type of configuration information, and use the second type of indication information to determine whether to perform the monitoring step.
可选地,如S101中一实施例所述,如果切换命令仅包括指示信息的类型切换指示,而切换命令中不包括具体的指示信息的类型,则在S103中终端设备还需要首先根据切换命令确定所要切换的第二类型的指示信息之后,再确定第二类型的指示信息对应的配置信息。Optionally, as described in an embodiment of S101, if the handover command includes only the type of indication information and the handover command does not include the specific type of indication information, the terminal device in S103 also needs to first perform After determining the second type of indication information to be switched, then determine the configuration information corresponding to the second type of indication information.
对于终端设备来说,该类型的切换命令的一种可能的处理方式为,如果终端设备仅配置了两种类型的指示信息,终端一旦收到切换命令,就将目前所配置的指示信息切换为另一种类型。例如:以GTS和WUS为例,终端设备通过监测GTS确定是否执行监听步骤,而当终端设备收到切换命令后,确定将指示信息的类型从GTS切换为WUS,随后再确定指示信息WUS对应类型的配置信息,并通过WUS确定是否执行监听步骤。For a terminal device, one possible processing method of this type of switching command is that if the terminal device is configured with only two types of instruction information, once the terminal receives the switching command, it switches the currently configured instruction information to Another type. For example, taking GTS and WUS as examples, the terminal device monitors the GTS to determine whether to perform the monitoring step, and after receiving the switch command, the terminal device determines to switch the type of the instruction information from GTS to WUS, and then determines the corresponding type of the instruction information WUS Configuration information and determine whether to perform the listening step through WUS.
另一种可能的实现方式为:当终端设备收到切换命令后,根据切换命令、目前配置的第一类型的指示信息以及切换关系三种因素共同确定第二类型的配置信息。其中,切换关系包括了指示信息的各种类型之间的转换关系。切换关系可以是终端设备提前配置并存储在终端设备的存储设备中;或者切换关系也可以在切换命令中携带由网络设备实时发送给终端设备,这样的切换关系也就可以由网络设备根据业务情况实时调整切换关系。假设终端设备能够监测三种类型的指示信息A、B和C,因此该终端设备的切换关系包括:A-B,B-C和C-A三种转换关系,当终端设备收到切换命令后,需要根据切换关系对指示信息的类型进行切换。例如,终端设备通过监测A类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤。在终端设备收到切换命令后,终端设备根据该切换命令、目前监测的指示信息的类型A和切换关系中的“A-B”的转换关系,共同确定需要将指示信息的类型从A类型切换为B类型,即确定上述的第二类型的配置信息为B类型的指示信息对应的B类型的配置信息。并在切换命令生效后通过监测B类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤。需要说明的是,这里的切换关系仅为示例,切换关系中还可以包括更多种类的转换关系例如A-C,B-C和C-A等,在此不做限定。Another possible implementation manner is that when the terminal device receives the handover command, it determines the second type of configuration information according to three factors, namely, the handover command, the currently configured first type of indication information, and the handover relationship. The switching relationship includes a conversion relationship between various types of indication information. The switching relationship can be configured in advance by the terminal device and stored in the storage device of the terminal device; or the switching relationship can also be carried in the switching command and sent by the network device to the terminal device in real time. Such a switching relationship can also be controlled by the network device according to the service situation Adjust switching relationships in real time. It is assumed that the terminal device can monitor three types of indication information A, B, and C. Therefore, the switching relationship of the terminal device includes three conversion relationships: AB, BC, and CA. When the terminal device receives the switching command, it needs to Switch the type of instruction. For example, the terminal device determines whether to perform the monitoring step by monitoring type A instruction information. After the terminal device receives the switching command, the terminal device jointly determines that the type of the instruction information needs to be switched from type A to B according to the switching command, the type A of the monitoring information currently being monitored, and the conversion relationship of "AB" in the switching relationship. Type, that is, determining that the second type of configuration information is type B configuration information corresponding to type B instruction information. After the switching command takes effect, it is determined whether to perform the monitoring step by monitoring type B instruction information. It should be noted that the switching relationship here is only an example, and the switching relationship may further include more types of conversion relationships such as A-C, B-C, and C-A, which are not limited herein.
可选地,在S103之后,S104之前,还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送切换确认信息;其中,切换确认信息用于向网络设备通知终端设备已执行S103中确定第二类型的配置信息,即终端设备已经使切换命令生效,并配置了第二类型的配置信息,已能够执行监测第二类型的指示信息。因此,终端设备能够在已经通过S103使切换命令生效后,向网络设备发送确认信息进行确认,使得网络设备和终端设备两侧都确认进行指示信息的类型的切换。从而避免了了指示信息通信时由于终端设备的性能或者网络时延造成的,终端设备尚未配置好第二类型的配置信息时,还不能监测第二类型的指示信息时,网络设备就已向终端设备发送第二类型的指示信息。Optionally, after S103 and before S104, the method further includes: the terminal device sends handover confirmation information to the network device; wherein the handover confirmation information is used to notify the network device that the terminal device has performed the second type of configuration information determined in S103, that is, The terminal device has enabled the handover command and configured the second type of configuration information, and has been able to perform monitoring the second type of instruction information. Therefore, after the terminal device has made the switching command effective through S103, the terminal device can send confirmation information to the network device for confirmation, so that both the network device and the terminal device confirm that the type of the instruction information is switched. Therefore, it is avoided that the performance of the terminal device or the network delay caused by the instruction information communication, when the terminal device has not been configured with the second type of configuration information, and cannot monitor the second type of instruction information, the network device has already sent the terminal to the terminal. The device sends the second type of indication information.
S104:终端设备根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。S104: The terminal device monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
具体地,在本实施例中,当终端设备通过S103确定第二类型的配置信息后,根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。其中,监测第二类型的指示信息包括:通过是否接收到第二类型的指示信息确定是否执行监听步骤。至此,终端设备完成根据切换命令切换指示信息的类型,终端设备由收到切换命令之前的监测第一类型的指示信息,更改为监测第二类型的指示信息。可选地,所述的监听步骤为:终端根据是否接收到来自网络设备的第二类型的指示信息,确定是否监测物理下行控制信道PDCCH,或监测PDCCH,或不监测PDCCH;或者,确定是否接收物理下行共享信道PDSCH,或接收PDSCH,或不接收PDSCH。Specifically, in this embodiment, after the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information through S103, it monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information. Wherein, monitoring the second type of indication information includes: determining whether to perform the monitoring step according to whether the second type of indication information is received. At this point, the terminal device completes switching the type of the instruction information according to the switching command, and the terminal device changes from monitoring the first type of instruction information to monitoring the second type of instruction information before receiving the switching command. Optionally, the monitoring step is: the terminal determines whether to monitor the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, or monitors the PDCCH, or does not monitor the PDCCH according to whether the terminal receives the second type of indication information from the network device; or determines whether to receive the PDCCH The physical downlink shared channel PDSCH either receives the PDSCH or does not receive the PDSCH.
可选地,网络设备向终端设备发送的切换命令中还包括了切换命令的持续时间。即,终端设备在收到切换命令并执行S103后,在持续时间内执行S104中的根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息;而在持续时间之后,终端设备再确定并配置第一类型的配置信息,并根据第一类型的配置信息监测第一类型的指示信息。从而使得网络设备能够根据业务需求,指示终端设备在一定时间内切换为监测第二类型的指示信息。终端设备在该段时间之后恢复监测收到切换命令前的第一类型的指示信息,提高了指示信息切换的灵活程度丰富了应用场景。Optionally, the switching command sent by the network device to the terminal device further includes a duration of the switching command. That is, after receiving the switching command and executing S103, the terminal device executes the monitoring of the second type of instruction information according to the second type of configuration information in S104 within the duration; and after the duration, the terminal device determines and configures the first A type of configuration information, and monitoring the first type of indication information according to the first type of configuration information. Therefore, the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch to monitoring the second type of instruction information within a certain time according to the service requirements. After this period of time, the terminal device resumes monitoring the first type of instruction information before receiving the switching command, which improves the flexibility of the instruction information switching and enriches the application scenario.
综上,本实施例提供的指示信息的通信方法中,通过网络设备生成并向终端设备发送的切换命令,该切换命令用于将指示信息类型由第一类型切换为第二类型,使得终端设备收到该切换命令后根据该切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,并根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。从而使得终端设备能够切换不同的指示信息进行通信,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景和业务的动态变化,提高终端的指示信息的切换灵活性,并进一步降低终端设备的功耗和通信开销。In summary, in the method for communicating instruction information provided in this embodiment, a switching command generated by a network device and sent to a terminal device is used to switch the type of instruction information from a first type to a second type, so that the terminal device After receiving the switching command, the second type of configuration information is determined according to the switching command, and the second type of indication information is monitored according to the second type of configuration information. Therefore, the terminal device can switch different instruction information for communication, thereby satisfying different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, improving the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reducing the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
进一步地,上述实施例中并未对终端设备的通信场景进行限定,并且网络设备向终端设备发送的指示命令并没有限定对终端设备的某次通信或者某种通信类型进行处理。即终端设备收到切换命令后,会将切换命令所指示的指示信息类型的切换应用于终端设备所有可能的通信场景中。例如,终端设备在载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)的通信场景下存在多个分量载波(component carrier,CC)上都有需要监测的指示信息、或者终端设备在其载波上存在一个或多个带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)的通信场景下一个或多个BWP上也都有需要监测的指示信息。这时,终端设备会将指示信息类型的切换应用于终端设备所有的激活CC或者所有激活BWP上。而这样的切换虽然已经达到了切换指示信息类型的目的,但是当终端设备在每个CC或者每个BWP上处理不同的业务时,网络设备无法根据切换命令为不同的CC或者不同的BWP上的不同业务下达指示信息类型切换的命令,无法精确地对某个或者某些激活的CC或者激活的BWP进行指示信息类型的切换。因此为了解决上述问题,丰富切换命令的应用场景、提高切换命令的指示效率,本申请在前述实施例的基础上,还提供一种指示信息通信方法,以使终端设备能够根据网络设备发送的切换命令确定切换特定CC或者特定BWP上的指示信息类型。Further, in the above embodiments, the communication scenario of the terminal device is not limited, and the instruction command sent by the network device to the terminal device does not limit the processing of a certain communication or a certain communication type of the terminal device. That is, after the terminal device receives the switching command, it applies the switching of the type of instruction information indicated by the switching command to all possible communication scenarios of the terminal device. For example, in a carrier aggregation (CA) communication scenario, a terminal device has multiple component carriers (CCs) with instructions that need to be monitored, or the terminal device has one or more bandwidths on its carrier. In part (bandwidth part, BWP) communication scenarios, one or more BWPs also have indication information that needs to be monitored. At this time, the terminal device applies the switching of the indication information type to all activated CCs or all activated BWPs of the terminal device. Although such a handover has achieved the purpose of switching the type of the instruction information, when the terminal device processes different services on each CC or each BWP, the network device cannot perform the switching on different CCs or different BWPs according to the handover command. Different services give instructions for switching the type of instruction information, and cannot accurately switch the type of instruction information for one or some activated CCs or activated BWPs. Therefore, in order to solve the above problems, enrich the application scenarios of the handover command, and improve the instruction efficiency of the handover command, based on the foregoing embodiments, this application also provides a method for communicating information of instructions, so that the terminal device can perform handover according to the network device. The command determines the type of indication information to switch on a specific CC or a specific BWP.
其中,在前述所述的基础上,本实施例提供的S103中终端设备执行的步骤是:终端设备根据切换命令和映射关系确定至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上的第二类型指示信息及其配置信息;S104中终端设备执行的步骤是:终端设备根据第二 类型的配置信息在至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上监测第二类型的指示信息。具体地,本实施实施例可通过如下方式实现。其中,本实施例中提供的切换命令包括:至少一个参数。至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型。则对应到上述实施例中,Wherein, based on the foregoing, the steps performed by the terminal device in S103 provided in this embodiment are: the terminal device determines at least one activated CC or a second type indication on at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship. Information and its configuration information; the step performed by the terminal device in S104 is: the terminal device monitors the second type of indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information. Specifically, this embodiment can be implemented in the following manner. The switching command provided in this embodiment includes: at least one parameter. At least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; at least one parameter is used to indicate that there is a mapping relationship between at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP. The type of indication information is from The first type is switched to the second type. Corresponding to the above embodiment,
可选地,这里的映射关系可由网络设备提前配置在终端设备中,终端设备在需要时使用。或者,该映射关系也可以携带在切换命令中,Optionally, the mapping relationship here can be configured in advance by the network device in the terminal device, and the terminal device can be used when needed. Alternatively, the mapping relationship may also be carried in a handover command.
需要说明的是,本申请各实施例中所述的切换命令所包含的参数,可以是一种命令、或者是通过至少一个比特所表示的信息,每个参数又可独立地看作是该参数对应的激活的CC或者激活的BWP上的指示信息类型的切换命令。It should be noted that the parameters included in the handover command described in the embodiments of the present application may be a command or information represented by at least one bit, and each parameter may be regarded as the parameter independently. Corresponding activated CC or activated BWP switching command indicating the type of information.
下面根据四种终端设备不同的应用场景下指示信息类型的切换方法对本实施例进行说明。The following describes the embodiment according to the method of switching the indication information type in four different application scenarios of the terminal device.
第一种应用场景为终端设备在非CA通信时,仅存在一个通信载波且该载波上仅存在一个激活的BWP。则此时的切换命令可以包括:一个参数。则此时,终端设备收到切换命令后,根据该切换命令确定切换该激活的BWP的指示信息的类型。假设该激活的BWP原先监测第一类型的指示信息,则终端设备需要根据切换命令确定该激活的BWP上的第二类型的配置信息,并在随后通过第二类型的配置信息在该激活的BWP上监测第二类型的指示信息。本实施例的实现流程同图5所示的流程,实现方式和原理同图5,不再赘述。The first application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a non-CA, there is only one communication carrier and there is only one activated BWP on the carrier. The switch command at this time may include: a parameter. At this time, after receiving the switching command, the terminal device determines the type of the instruction information for switching the activated BWP according to the switching command. Assuming that the activated BWP originally monitors the first type of indication information, the terminal device needs to determine the second type of configuration information on the activated BWP according to the switching command, and then use the second type of configuration information on the activated BWP. Monitor the second type of instruction. The implementation process of this embodiment is the same as the process shown in FIG. 5, and the implementation method and principle are the same as those in FIG. 5, and details are not described again.
第二种应用场景为终端设备在非CA通信时,仅存在一条通信载波且该载波上存在多个激活的BWP。则此时的切换命令可以包括:至少一个参数;映射关系包括:至少一个参数为多个参数时,多个参数与多个激活的BWP之间的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数为一个或多个参数时,至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的BWP之间的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数为多个参数时,至少一个参数中多个参数组成的参数组合与多个激活的BWP之间的对应关系。从而能够实现终端设备从一个激活的BWP上收到的切换命令,可以实现其他激活的BWP上的指示信息的类型的切换。The second application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a non-CA, there is only one communication carrier and there are multiple activated BWPs on the carrier. Then the switching command at this time may include: at least one parameter; the mapping relationship includes: when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, a one-to-one correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs; or, at least one parameter is one When there are multiple parameters, the corresponding relationship between each parameter in at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs; or when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, the parameter combination of multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated BWP. In this way, the switching command received by the terminal device from one activated BWP can be realized, and the type of instruction information on other activated BWPs can be switched.
即,本实施例的映射关系包括了三种可能的实现方式:①、至少一个参数为多个参数时,多个参数中每个参数对应一个激活的BWP,二者是一一对应的关系,例如终端设备非CA通信的一条载波上存在3个激活的BWP,由于3个激活的BWP可能承载不同的业务则网络设备希望对终端设备的三个激活的BWP上的PDCCH监测或PDSCH接收进行分别控制。因此切换命令可以包括3个参数,假设采用比特位形式的3个参数为“000”,映射关系为每一比特为分别一一对应3个激活的BWP,并假设参数为1时指示对应的激活的BWP上的指示信息的类型进行切换。则当终端收到了切换命令“100”,根据该切换命令和映射关系确定第一个激活的BWP上的指示信息的类型需要进行切换,并执行后续的切换动作。②、至少一个参数中的每个参数对应多个激活的BWP,二者是一对多的关系。当至少一个参数为一个时,该一个参数用于对应多个激活的BWP中所有的激活的BWP,当至少一个参数为多个时,每个参数可分别对应不同的多个激活的BWP。例如:终端设备非CA通信的一条载波上存在4个激活的BWP,切换命令为一 个参数时,映射关系可以是一个参数与4个激活的BWP之间的一对多对应关系。又或者,切换命令为两个参数时,映射关系可以是其中一个参数与其中2个激活的BWP之间的一对多的对应关系和另一个参数与另2个激活的BWP之间的对应关系。假设采用比特位形式的两个参数为“00”,映射关系为第一比特位和第二比特位分别对应前后2个激活的BWP,则当终端设备收到了切换命令“10”,根据切换命令和映射关系确定4个激活的BWP中前两个激活的BWP上的指示信息的类型需要进行切换。③、至少一个参数为多个参数,并且多个参数与多个激活的BWP之间存在对应关系。例如,假设切换命令至少包括了3个参数“000”,同时假设存在8个激活的BWP,则3个参数可对应8个激活的BWP中任意一个或多个,例如:000对应所有的8个激活的BWP;001对应第一个激活的BWP;010对应前两个激活的BWP等。或者,多个参数中的任意多个参数均可形成一个参数组合,多个激活的BWP中的任意多个激活的BWP也可以形成一个BWP组合,以建立参数组合与BWP组合之间的对应关系。又例如,上述示例中的3个参数还可以以组合的形式形成参数组合与BWP组合的对应关系,例如将则3个参数可组成8个参数组合为:“000”“001”……“111”;根据8个激活的BWP的ID分别为1-8,则8个激活的BWP可组成至少8个不同的BWP组合记为:组合1:1;组合2:1-2;……组合8:1-8。则切换命令中3个参数形成的8个参数组合能够与8个激活的BWP中8个不同的BWP组合进行一一对应,如参数组合“000”对应BWP组合1;参数组合“001”对应BWP组合2;……;参数组合“111”对应BWP组合8。That is, the mapping relationship of this embodiment includes three possible implementation modes: ①, when at least one parameter is multiple parameters, each parameter of the multiple parameters corresponds to an activated BWP, and the two are in a one-to-one relationship. For example, there are 3 activated BWPs on a carrier for non-CA communication of the terminal equipment. Since the 3 activated BWPs may carry different services, the network equipment wishes to perform PDCCH monitoring or PDSCH reception on the three activated BWPs of the terminal equipment separately. control. Therefore, the switch command can include 3 parameters. It is assumed that the 3 parameters in the form of bits are “000”, and the mapping relationship is that each bit corresponds to 3 activated BWPs, and the corresponding activation is assumed when the parameter is 1. Switch the type of instructions on the BWP. Then, when the terminal receives the handover command "100", it is determined according to the handover command and the mapping relationship that the type of the indication information on the first activated BWP needs to be handed over, and a subsequent handover action is performed. ② Each parameter of at least one parameter corresponds to multiple activated BWPs, and the two are in a one-to-many relationship. When at least one parameter is one, the one parameter is used to correspond to all activated BWPs in the multiple activated BWPs. When at least one parameter is multiple, each parameter may correspond to a different multiple activated BWPs, respectively. For example, if there are 4 activated BWPs on a carrier for non-CA communication of a terminal device, and the switch command is a parameter, the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between a parameter and the 4 activated BWPs. Or, when the switching command is two parameters, the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between one parameter and two of the activated BWPs, and a correspondence between the other parameter and the other two activated BWPs. . Assume that the two parameters in the bit form are "00" and the mapping relationship is that the first bit and the second bit correspond to the two activated BWPs before and after, respectively. When the terminal device receives the handover command "10", according to the handover command And the mapping relationship determines that the types of indication information on the first two activated BWPs among the four activated BWPs need to be switched. ③ At least one parameter is multiple parameters, and there is a corresponding relationship between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs. For example, assuming that the switch command includes at least 3 parameters "000" and assuming that there are 8 activated BWPs, the 3 parameters can correspond to any one or more of the 8 activated BWPs, for example: 000 corresponds to all 8 Activated BWP; 001 corresponds to the first activated BWP; 010 corresponds to the first two activated BWP, etc. Alternatively, any one of a plurality of parameters may form a parameter combination, and any of a plurality of activated BWPs may also form a BWP combination to establish a correspondence between the parameter combination and the BWP combination. . For another example, the three parameters in the above example can also form a correspondence relationship between the parameter combination and the BWP combination in the form of a combination. For example, three parameters can be combined into eight parameter combinations as: "000" "001" ... "111 According to the IDs of the 8 activated BWPs are 1-8 respectively, then the 8 activated BWPs can form at least 8 different BWP combinations, which are recorded as: Combination 1: 1; Combination 2: 1-2; ... Combination 8 : 1-8. Then the 8 parameter combinations formed by the 3 parameters in the switch command can be in one-to-one correspondence with 8 different BWP combinations in the 8 activated BWPs, such as the parameter combination "000" corresponding to BWP combination 1; the parameter combination "001" corresponding to BWP Combination 2; ...; The parameter combination "111" corresponds to BWP combination 8.
第三种应用场景为终端设备在CA通信时,存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC上仅存在一个激活的BWP。则此时的切换命令可以包括:至少一个参数;映射关系包括:至少一个参数为多个参数时,多个参数与多个激活的CC之间的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数为一个或多个参数时,至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC之间的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数为多个参数时,至少一个参数中多个参数组成的参数组合与多个激活的CC之间的对应关系。从而能够实现终端设备从一个激活的CC上收到的切换命令,可以实现其他激活的CC上的指示信息的类型的切换。特别地,在CA通信时,网络设备可以将切换命令仅在主小区的CC上发送,而能够实现主小区和/或任一激活的辅小区的CC上指示信息类型的切换。The third application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a CA, there are multiple activated CCs and only one activated BWP exists on each activated CC. Then the switching command at this time may include: at least one parameter; the mapping relationship includes: when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, a one-to-one correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated CCs; or at least one parameter is one When there are multiple parameters, the corresponding relationship between each parameter in at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs; or, when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, the parameter combination consisting of multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated CCs. In this way, the switching command received by the terminal device from one activated CC can be realized, and the type of instruction information on other activated CCs can be switched. In particular, during the CA communication, the network device may send the handover command only on the CC of the primary cell, and can implement the switching of the indicated information type on the CC of the primary cell and / or any activated secondary cell.
同样地,本实施例的映射关系包括了三种可能的实现方式:①、至少一个参数为多个参数时,多个参数中每个参数对应一个激活的CC,二者是一一对应的关系,例如终端设备CA通信时存在3个激活的CC,由于3个激活的CC可能承载不同的业务则网络设备希望对终端设备的三个激活的CC上的PDCCH监测或PDSCH接收进行分别控制。因此切换命令可以包括3个参数,假设采用比特位形式的3个参数为“000”,映射关系为每一比特为分别一一对应3个激活的CC,并假设参数为1时指示对应的激活的CC上的指示信息的类型进行切换。则当终端收到了切换命令“100”,根据该切换命令和映射关系确定第一个激活的CC上的指示信息的类型需要进行切换,并执行后续的切换动作。②、至少一个参数中的每个参数对应多个激活的CC,二者是一对多的关系。当至少一个参数为一个时,该一个参数用于对应多个激活的CC中所有的激活的CC;当至少一个参数为多个时,每个参数可分别对应不同的多个激活的CC。例如:终端设备CA通信时存在4个激活的CC,切换命令为一个参数时,映射关系可以是一个参数与4 个激活的CC之间的一对多对应关系。又或者,切换命令为两个参数时,映射关系可以是其中一个参数与其中2个激活的CC之间的一对多的对应关系和另一个参数与另2个激活的CC之间的对应关系。假设采用比特位形式的两个参数为“00”,映射关系为第一比特位和第二比特位分别对应前后2个激活的CC,则当终端设备收到了切换命令“10”,根据切换命令和映射关系确定4个激活的CC中前两个激活的CC上的指示信息的类型需要进行切换。③、至少一个参数为多个参数,并且多个参数组成的参数组合与多个激活的CC之间存在对应关系。例如,假设切换命令至少包括了3个参数“000”,同时假设存在8个激活的CC,则3个参数可对应8个激活的CC中任意一个或多个,例如:000对应所有的8个激活的CC;001对应第一个激活的CC;010对应前两个激活的CC等。或者,多个参数中的任意多个参数均可形成一个参数组合,多个激活的CC中的多个激活的CC也可以形成一个CC组合,以建立参数组合与CC组合之间的对应关系。又例如,上述示例中的3个参数还可以以组合的形式形成参数组合与CC组合的对应关系,例如将3个参数可组成8个参数组合为:“000”“001”……“111”;根据8个激活的CC的ID分别为1-8,则8个激活的CC可组成至少8个不同的CC组合记为:组合1:1;组合2:1-2;……;组合8:1-8。则切换命令中的3个参数组成的8个参数组合能够与8个激活的中8个不同的BWP组合进行一一对应,如参数组合“000”对应CC组合1;参数组合“001”对应CC组合2;……;参数组合“111”对应CC组合8。Similarly, the mapping relationship of this embodiment includes three possible implementation modes: ① When at least one parameter is multiple parameters, each parameter of the multiple parameters corresponds to an activated CC, and the two are in a one-to-one correspondence relationship. For example, when the terminal equipment CA communicates with three activated CCs, since the three activated CCs may carry different services, the network equipment wishes to control the PDCCH monitoring or PDSCH reception on the three activated CCs of the terminal equipment separately. Therefore, the switch command can include 3 parameters. It is assumed that the 3 parameters in the form of bits are “000”, the mapping relationship is that each bit corresponds to 3 activated CCs, and the corresponding activation is assumed when the parameter is 1. The type of the indication information on the CC is switched. Then, when the terminal receives the handover command "100", it is determined according to the handover command and the mapping relationship that the type of the indication information on the first activated CC needs to be handed over, and a subsequent handover action is performed. ② Each of the at least one parameter corresponds to multiple activated CCs, and the two are in a one-to-many relationship. When at least one parameter is one, the one parameter is used to correspond to all activated CCs in the multiple activated CCs; when at least one parameter is multiple, each parameter may correspond to a different multiple activated CCs, respectively. For example, when the terminal equipment CA communicates with four activated CCs, when the switching command is a parameter, the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between a parameter and the four activated CCs. Or alternatively, when the switch command is two parameters, the mapping relationship may be a one-to-many correspondence between one parameter and two of the activated CCs and a correspondence between the other parameter and the other two activated CCs. . Assume that the two parameters in the bit form are "00", and the mapping relationship is that the first bit and the second bit correspond to the two activated CCs before and after, respectively. When the terminal device receives the switch command "10", according to the switch command And the mapping relationship determines that the types of indication information on the first two activated CCs among the four activated CCs need to be switched. ③ At least one parameter is multiple parameters, and there is a corresponding relationship between a parameter combination composed of multiple parameters and multiple activated CCs. For example, assuming that the switch command includes at least 3 parameters "000" and assuming that there are 8 activated CCs, the 3 parameters can correspond to any one or more of the 8 activated CCs, for example: 000 corresponds to all 8 Activated CC; 001 corresponds to the first activated CC; 010 corresponds to the first two activated CCs. Alternatively, any one of a plurality of parameters may form a parameter combination, and a plurality of activated CCs among a plurality of activated CCs may also form a CC combination to establish a correspondence relationship between the parameter combination and the CC combination. For another example, the three parameters in the above example can also form a correspondence relationship between the parameter combination and the CC combination in the form of a combination. For example, three parameters can be combined into eight parameter combinations as: "000" "001" ... "111" ; According to the IDs of the 8 activated CCs are 1-8, the 8 activated CCs can form at least 8 different CC combinations, which are recorded as: Combination 1: 1; Combination 2: 1-2; ...; Combination 8 : 1-8. Then the 8 parameter combinations composed of 3 parameters in the switch command can correspond to the 8 activated 8 different BWP combinations one-to-one, such as the parameter combination "000" corresponding to CC combination 1; the parameter combination "001" corresponding to CC Combination 2; ...; The parameter combination "111" corresponds to CC combination 8.
第四种应用场景为终端设备在CA通信时,存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC上存在多个激活的BWP。则此时的切换命令可以包括:至少一个参数;映射关系包括:至少一个参数为多个参数时,多个参数与多个激活CC中每个激活的CC中每个激活的BWP之间的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数为一个或多个参数时,至少一个参数中每个参数与一个或多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的BWP之间的对应关系;或者至少一个参数为多个参数时,至少一个参数中多个参数组成的参数组合与一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。即,本实施例中可以不考虑每个激活的BWP来自哪个激活的CC,每个参数组合所对应的一个或多个激活的BWP可以是相同或者不同的激活的CC所具有的激活的BWP。从而能够实现终端设备从一个激活的CC具有的一个BWP上收到的切换命令,可以实现其他BWP的指示信息的类型的切换。特别地,在CA通信时,网络设备可以将切换命令仅在主小区的CC上发送,而能够实现主小区的CC上和/或任一激活的辅小区的CC上的激活的BWP的指示信息类型的切换。The fourth application scenario is that when a terminal device communicates with a CA, there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs. Then the switching command at this time may include: at least one parameter; the mapping relationship includes: when the at least one parameter is multiple parameters, one of the multiple parameters and each activated BWP in each activated CC in the multiple activated CCs A correspondence relationship; or, when at least one parameter is one or more parameters, a correspondence relationship between each parameter in at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs; or at least one parameter When there are multiple parameters, a correspondence between a parameter combination composed of multiple parameters in at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs. That is, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to consider which activated CC each activated BWP comes from, and one or more activated BWPs corresponding to each parameter combination may be activated BWPs of the same or different activated CCs. Thereby, it is possible to implement a handover command received by the terminal device from one BWP possessed by an activated CC, and it is possible to switch over the types of indication information of other BWPs. In particular, during CA communication, the network device may send the handover command only on the CC of the primary cell, and can implement the indication information of the activated BWP on the CC of the primary cell and / or the CC of any activated secondary cell. Type switching.
同样地,本实施例的映射关系包括了三种可能的实现方式:①、至少一个参数为多个参数时,多个参数中每个参数对应每个激活的CC中每个激活的BWP之间的对应关系,二者是一一对应的关系。例如:终端CA通信时存在2个激活的CC,每个激活的CC具有2个激活的BWP,因此切换命令需要包括4个参数,假设采用比特位形式表示为“0000”,其中每个参数分别对应了2个激活CC上的共4个激活的BWP。②、至少一个参数中的每个参数对应多个BWP,这里的多个激活的BWP可以是一个激活的CC具有的,也可以是多个激活的CC具有的。例如当至少一个参数为一个参数时,该一个参数用于对应所有激活的CC上具有的所有BWP,因此映射关系可以是一个参数与2个激活CC上的共4个激活的BWP之间的一对多对应关系。又或者,当至少一个参数为多个 参数时,每个参数可分别对应一个或多个激活的CC上具有的多个BWP,例如切换命令为两个参数时,映射关系可以包括其中一个参数与其中第一个激活的CC的第一个激活的BWP、第二个激活的CC的第一个激活的BWP之间的一对二的对应关系,和另一个参数与第二个激活的CC的第二个激活的BWP、第二个激活的CC的第二个激活的BWP之间的一对二的对应关系。假设采用比特位形式的两个参数为“00”,则当终端设备收到了切换命令“10”,根据切换命令和映射关系确定第一个激活的CC的第一个激活的BWP和第二个激活的CC的第一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型需要进行切换。③、至少一个参数为多个参数,并且多个参数组成的参数组合与一个或多个激活的CC具有的多个BWP之间存在对应关系。例如,假设切换命令至少包括了3个参数“000”,同时假设存在2个激活的CC,每个激活的CC具有4个激活的BWP,总共8个激活的BWP。则3个参数可对应总共8个激活的BWP中任意一个或多个,例如:000对应所有的8个激活的BWP;001对应第一个激活的CC上的第一个激活的BWP;010对应第一个激活的CC上所有激活的BWP等。或者,多个参数中的任意多个参数均可形成一个参数组合,一个或多个激活的CC中的多个激活的BWP中的任意多个激活的BWP也可以组成一个激活的BWP组,以建立参数组合与BWP组合之间的对应关系,而BWP组合中的多个BWP可以来自一个或多个激活的CC。又例如,上述示例中的3个参数可组成8个参数组合为:“000”“001”……“111”;则共8个激活的BWP可组成至少8个不同的BWP组合记为:组合1:1;组合2:1-2;……组合8:1-8。则切换命令中的3个参数形成的8个参数组合能够与8个BWP组合进行一一对应,如参数组合“000”对应BWP组合1;参数组合“001”对应BWP组合2……参数组合“111”对应BWP组合8。这里的BWP组可以不考虑每个激活的BWP来自哪个激活的CC,每一组中包括的激活的BWP可以是相同或者不同的激活的CC上的激活的BWP。Similarly, the mapping relationship in this embodiment includes three possible implementation modes: ① When at least one parameter is multiple parameters, each parameter in the multiple parameters corresponds to each activated BWP in each activated CC The correspondence relationship between the two is one-to-one correspondence. For example: There are 2 activated CCs when the terminal CA communicates, and each activated CC has 2 activated BWP, so the switching command needs to include 4 parameters, assuming that it is expressed as "0000" in bit form, where each parameter is Corresponding to a total of 4 activated BWPs on 2 activated CCs. ② Each parameter of the at least one parameter corresponds to multiple BWPs. Here, multiple activated BWPs may be possessed by one activated CC, or may be possessed by multiple activated CCs. For example, when at least one parameter is a parameter, the one parameter is used to correspond to all BWPs on all activated CCs, so the mapping relationship may be one between a parameter and a total of 4 activated BWPs on 2 activated CCs. Many-to-many correspondence. Or, when at least one parameter is multiple parameters, each parameter may respectively correspond to multiple BWPs on one or more activated CCs. For example, when the switch command is two parameters, the mapping relationship may include one of the parameters and The one-to-two correspondence between the first activated BWP of the first activated CC, the first activated BWP of the second activated CC, and the other parameter with the second activated CC A one-to-two correspondence between the second activated BWP and the second activated BWP of the second activated CC. Assuming that the two parameters in the bit form are "00", when the terminal device receives the handover command "10", the first activated BWP and the second one of the first activated CC are determined according to the handover command and the mapping relationship. The type of the indication information on the first activated BWP of the activated CC needs to be switched. ③ At least one parameter is a plurality of parameters, and there is a corresponding relationship between a parameter combination composed of a plurality of parameters and a plurality of BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs. For example, it is assumed that the switching command includes at least 3 parameters "000", and it is also assumed that there are 2 activated CCs, each activated CC has 4 activated BWPs, and a total of 8 activated BWPs. The 3 parameters can correspond to any one or more of a total of 8 activated BWPs, for example: 000 corresponds to all 8 activated BWPs; 001 corresponds to the first activated BWP on the first activated CC; 010 corresponds to All activated BWPs on the first activated CC, etc. Alternatively, any of multiple parameters may form a parameter combination, and any of multiple activated BWPs in multiple activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs may also form an activated BWP group. Establish the correspondence between parameter combinations and BWP combinations, and multiple BWPs in a BWP combination can come from one or more activated CCs. For another example, the three parameters in the above example can be combined into eight parameter combinations: "000", "001" ... "111"; then a total of 8 activated BWPs can be combined to form at least 8 different BWP combinations. 1: 1; combination 2: 1-2; ... combination 8: 1-8. Then the 8 parameter combinations formed by the 3 parameters in the switch command can be in one-to-one correspondence with 8 BWP combinations, such as parameter combination "000" corresponding to BWP combination 1; parameter combination "001" corresponding to BWP combination 2 ... parameter combination " 111 "corresponds to BWP combination 8. The BWP group here may not consider which activated CC each activated BWP comes from, and the activated BWP included in each group may be activated BWP on the same or different activated CC.
进一步地,在上述各实施例中,S101中网络设备在确定需要将终端设备的指示信息由第一类型切换为第二类型后就生成切换命令。而具体如何使得网络设备确定可以生成该切换命令,本申请提供几种网络设备确定生成切换命令的判断方法,下面结合图6和图7分别进行说明。Further, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the network device in S101 generates a switching command after determining that the instruction information of the terminal device needs to be switched from the first type to the second type. Specifically, how to make the network device determine that the handover command can be generated. This application provides several methods for determining the network device to determine the handover command, which will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7 respectively.
图6为本申请指示信息通信方法一实施例的流程示意图。如图6所示的实施例示出了一种由终端设备根据切换准则判断是否对指示信息的类型进行切换,如果终端设备判断需要切换指示信息的类型时,终端设备向网络设备发送切换请求,以请求切换指示信息的类型。如图6所示,本实施例在如图5所示实施例的基础上,在S101之前还包括:FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method of the present application. The embodiment shown in FIG. 6 shows a method in which a terminal device determines whether to switch the type of instruction information according to a switching criterion. If the terminal device determines that the type of the instruction information needs to be switched, the terminal device sends a switching request to a network device to Request to switch the type of instruction information. As shown in FIG. 6, based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, before S101, this embodiment further includes:
S201:终端设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则;则执行S202:终端设备向网络设备发送切换请求;其中,切换请求用于向网络设备请求切换指示信息的类型。此外,如果终端设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度不满足切换准则,则终端设备不会向网络设备发送切换请求,网络设备在没有收到切换请求的情况下也就不会执行后续的S101生成切换命令。即,终端设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度不满足切换准则时,保持现有的终端设备的指示信息的类型不切换。S201: The terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion; then executes S202: the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used to request the type of handover instruction information from the network device. In addition, if the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not meet the handover criteria, the terminal device will not send a handover request to the network device, and the network device will not perform the request without receiving the handover request. A subsequent S101 generates a switching command. That is, when the terminal device judges that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not meet the handover criterion, the type of the indication information of the existing terminal device is not switched.
可选地,这里的S201中终端设备对其和网络设备之间的业务密度的判断可以配置 为定时执行,终端设备每间隔固定的时间执行一次S201中对该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度的判断。Optionally, the determination of the service density between the terminal device and the network device in S201 here may be configured to be performed periodically, and the terminal device executes the service between the terminal device and the network device in S201 at a fixed interval. Judgment of density.
具体地,本实施例提供下述一种切换准则可能的设置方式以做示例。例如,切换准则包括:若第一类型的指示信息为GTS时,终端设备和网络设备之间固定时长T内的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;若第一类型的指示信息为WUS,终端设备和网络设备之间固定时长T内的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。其中,业务密度可以是终端设备的数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)的数量、终端设备各DRB的吞吐量之和、终端设备的各DRB的平均吞吐量或者终端设备的最大DRB吞吐量、或终端设备在单位时间内被寻呼的次数。Specifically, this embodiment provides a possible setting manner of a switching criterion as an example below. For example, the handover criterion includes: if the first type of indication information is GTS, the service density within a fixed time period T between the terminal device and the network device is lower than the first preset threshold; if the first type of indication information is WUS, the terminal The service density within a fixed time period T between the device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold. Among them, the service density may be the number of data radio bearers (DRBs) of the terminal equipment, the sum of the throughput of each DRB of the terminal equipment, the average throughput of each DRB of the terminal equipment, or the maximum DRB throughput of the terminal equipment, Or the number of times the terminal device has been paged in a unit time.
其中,若第一类型的指示信息为GTS,对于配置了GTS机制的终端设备,网络设备只有在不需要监听PDCCH和接收PDSCH的DRX周期之前或期间才会向终端设备发送指示信息GTS。因此一旦终端设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值,则终端设备确定其业务不频繁,在大部分DRX周期都不需要监听PDCCH或接收PDSCH,也就不需要网络设备在每个DRX周期前都向终端设备发送一个GTS的指示信息,此时需要将第一类型的指示信息GTS切换为第二类型的指示信息,以减少指示信息GTS的传输。而较佳地,切换准则还可以进一步指示在业务密度低于第一预设阈值时,将GTS切换为WUS。Wherein, if the first type of indication information is GTS, for a terminal device configured with a GTS mechanism, the network device sends the indication information GTS to the terminal device only before or during a DRX cycle that does not need to monitor the PDCCH and receive the PDSCH. Therefore, once the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than the first preset threshold, the terminal device determines that its service is infrequent, and does not need to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH in most DRX cycles. It is required that the network device sends a GTS instruction to the terminal device before each DRX cycle. At this time, the first type of instruction information GTS needs to be switched to the second type of instruction information to reduce the transmission of the instruction information GTS. Preferably, the handover criterion may further instruct to switch the GTS to WUS when the service density is lower than the first preset threshold.
若第一类型的指示信息为WUS,对于配置了WUS机制的终端设备,网络设备在每个需要监测PDCCH或接收PDSCH的DRX周期之前或期间需要向终端设备发送指示信息WUS,以使终端设备对指示信息进行处理并在DRX周期的激活时间处于激活状态。因此一旦终端设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度高于第一预设阈值,则终端设备确定其业务较频繁,在大部分DRX周期都需要监听PDCCH或接收PDSCH,也就也就不需要网络设备在每个DRX周期前都向终端设备发送一个WUS的指示信息,此时需要将第一类型的指示信息WUS切换为第二类型的指示信息,以减少指示信息WUS的传输。而较佳地,切换准则还可以进一步指示在业务密度高于第二预设阈值时,将WUS切换为GTS。If the first type of instruction information is WUS, for a terminal device configured with the WUS mechanism, the network device needs to send the instruction information WUS to the terminal device before or during each DRX cycle that needs to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH, so that the terminal device can The instruction is processed and is active during the activation time of the DRX cycle. Therefore, once the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than the first preset threshold, the terminal device determines that its service is more frequent and needs to monitor the PDCCH or receive the PDSCH in most DRX cycles. It is not necessary for the network device to send a WUS instruction message to the terminal device before each DRX cycle. At this time, the first type of instruction information WUS needs to be switched to the second type of instruction information to reduce the transmission of the instruction information WUS. Preferably, the handover criterion may further instruct to switch the WUS to the GTS when the service density is higher than the second preset threshold.
因此,本申请通过提供一种指示信息的通信方法,以在终端设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则时,终端设备向网络设备发送切换请求,再由网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,使得网络设备和终端设备二者之间使用不同的指示信息进行通信,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景,提高终端的指示信息的切换灵活性,并进一步降低终端设备的耗电量和通信开销。Therefore, the present application provides a communication method of indication information, so that when the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion, the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device, and then the network device sends the request to the terminal. The device sends a switch command, so that the network device and the terminal device use different instruction information for communication, so as to meet different usage scenarios of the terminal device, improve the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption of the terminal device. Volume and communication overhead.
可选地,在如图6所示的实施例中,当网络设备收到终端设备在S202发送的切换请求后,网络设备还需要对终端设备的切换请求进行判断,判断该终端设备是否可以按照其所请求对指示信息的类型进行切换。如果判断可以进行指示信息类型的切换,则网络设备再执行S101生成该终端设备的切换命令;如果判断不能进行指示信息类型的切换,则网络设备不执行S101生成该终端设备的切换命令。Optionally, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, after the network device receives the handover request sent by the terminal device in S202, the network device further needs to determine the handover request of the terminal device to determine whether the terminal device can perform It requests to switch the type of the indication information. If it is determined that the switching of the instruction information type can be performed, the network device executes S101 to generate a switching command of the terminal device; if it is determined that the switching of the instruction information type cannot be performed, the network device does not execute S101 to generate the switching command of the terminal device.
可选地,当网络设备判断不能根据终端设备的切换请求进行指示信息类型的切换,则终端设备可以再以返回消息的形式向终端设备通知其切换请求无效。Optionally, when the network device determines that the type of indication information cannot be switched according to the switching request of the terminal device, the terminal device may notify the terminal device that the switching request is invalid in the form of a return message.
具体地,本申请提供两种可能的网络设备判断终端设备是否可根据其切换请求进 行指示信息类型切换的方式。Specifically, this application provides two possible ways for a network device to determine whether a terminal device can switch the type of instruction information according to its switching request.
在一种可能的实现方式中,对于同一小区内不同的终端设备所使用的指示信息不同的应用场景,网络设备在接收到终端设备的切换请求后,仅针对该终端设备是否能够进行切换进行判断。其中,网络设备可以通过判断切换请求和/或其他信息是否满足该终端设备的指示信息的类型切换的条件,确定该终端设备的指示信息的类型是否可进行切换。例如:若终端设备根据前述实施例中的方式确定需要将指示信息的类型切换为WUS时,向网络设备发送切换请求。当网络设备收到终端设备发送的切换请求后,网络设备根据该终端设备的切换请求,从网络侧可用资源考虑,如果此时网络资源开销较大,判断如果该终端设备的指示信息切换为WUS之后会进一步增加网络资源的开销,影响网络资源状况,则判断不能相应该终端设备的切换请求,即不执行S101;如果此时网络资源开销较小,可以允许该终端设备的指示信息切换为WUS,则确定该终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换。In a possible implementation manner, for application scenarios in which different terminal devices in the same cell use different instruction information, the network device determines whether the terminal device can perform handover after receiving the handover request of the terminal device. . The network device may determine whether the type of the instruction information of the terminal device can be switched by determining whether the switching request and / or other information meets a condition of the type of instruction information of the terminal device switching. For example, if the terminal device determines that the type of the instruction information needs to be switched to WUS according to the manner in the foregoing embodiment, it sends a switching request to the network device. After the network device receives the handover request sent by the terminal device, the network device considers the available resources on the network side according to the handover request of the terminal device. If the network resource overhead is large at this time, determine if the instruction information of the terminal device is switched to WUS After that, the overhead of network resources will be further increased, affecting the status of network resources, it is determined that the switching request of the terminal device cannot be responded to, that is, S101 is not executed; if the network resource overhead is small at this time, the instruction information of the terminal device may be allowed to switch to WUS , It is determined that the type of the indication information of the terminal device can be switched.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,对于同一小区内不同的终端设备所使用的指示信息类型需要保持相同的应用场景,网络设备在接收到终端设备的切换请求后,需要考虑小区内所有的终端设备。因此,网络设备判断来自终端设备所在小区内所有终端设备发送的切换请求的数量,若数量大于预设阈值,则网络设备确定终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换;若数量小于预设阈值,则网络设备确定终端设备的指示信息的类型不能进行切换。具体地,对于同一小区内不同的终端设备所使用的指示信息相同的应用场景,网络设备需要从小区整体角度出发,判断是否统一对小区内所有终端所使用的指示信息进行切换。例如:某小区内存在10个终端设备,都配置第一类型的指示信息,当网络设备收到该小区内一个终端设备的切换请求后,判断收到该切换请求一定时间范围内是否收到了其他终端设备发送的切换请求。如果在收到该终端设备切换请求的一定时间范围内还收到了其他4个终端设备发送的切换请求,请求指示信息类型切换的终端设备的数量过半,则确定对该小区内所有终端设备的指示信息进行切换。而若当网络设备收到该小区内一个终端设备的切换请求后的一定时间范围内没有收到小区内其他终端设备发送的切换请求,则不对该终端发送的切换请求进行处理,并在一种可能的实施例中网络设备还可以通过反馈信息的方式告知该终端设备其切换请求未处理。In another possible implementation manner, the types of indication information used by different terminal devices in the same cell need to maintain the same application scenario. After receiving a handover request from a terminal device, the network device needs to consider all terminals in the cell. device. Therefore, the network device determines the number of handover requests sent from all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located. If the number is greater than a preset threshold, the network device determines the type of the terminal device's instruction information to perform handover; if the number is less than the preset threshold, Then the network device determines that the type of the indication information of the terminal device cannot be switched. Specifically, for an application scenario in which the same indication information is used by different terminal devices in the same cell, the network device needs to determine whether to switch the indication information used by all terminals in the cell from the overall perspective of the cell. For example, there are 10 terminal devices in a certain cell, all of which are configured with the first type of indication information. When a network device receives a handover request from a terminal device in the cell, it determines whether other handover requests have been received within a certain period of time. A handover request sent by a terminal device. If within a certain period of time of receiving the terminal device handover request, a handover request from the other 4 terminal devices is also received, and the number of terminal devices requesting the information type switching is more than half, determine the instructions for all terminal devices in the cell Information to switch. If a network device does not receive a handover request from another terminal device within a certain period of time after receiving a handover request from a terminal device in the cell, the handover request sent by the terminal is not processed, and the In a possible embodiment, the network device may also notify the terminal device that the handover request is not processed by way of feedback information.
图7为本申请指示信息通信方法一实施例的流程示意图。如图7所示的实施例示出了一种由网络设备根据切换准则判断是否对指示信息的类型进行切换,当需要切换时网络设备就向终端设备发送切换命令的方式。如图7所示,本实施例在如图5所示实施例的基础上,在S101之前还包括:FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of an embodiment of an information communication method according to the present application. The embodiment shown in FIG. 7 shows a manner in which the network device determines whether to switch the type of the indication information according to the switching criterion, and when the switching is needed, the network device sends a switching command to the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 7, based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, before S101, this embodiment further includes:
S301:网络判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则;则执行S101中的网络设备生成切换命令。此外,如果网络设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度不满足切换准则,则不会执行S101。即,网络设备判断该终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度不满足切换准则时,保持现有的终端设备的指示信息的类型不切换。S301: The network determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device satisfies a handover criterion; then executes the network device in S101 to generate a handover command. In addition, if the network device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not satisfy the handover criterion, S101 will not be performed. That is, when the network device judges that the service density between the terminal device and the network device does not satisfy the handover criterion, the type of the indication information of the existing terminal device is not switched.
可选地,这里的S301中网络设备对其和终端设备之间的业务密度的判断同样可以配置为定时执行,网络设备每间隔固定的时间执行一次S301中的判断。Optionally, the determination of the service density between the network device and the terminal device in S301 here may also be configured to be executed periodically, and the network device performs the determination in S301 every fixed time interval.
可选地,网络设备判断业务密度是否满足的切换准则可以采用如图6所示的实施 例中所述的可能使用的切换准则,具体判断依据相同,不再赘述。或者,此处的切换准则也可与图6所示的实施例中的切换准则不同。Optionally, the handover criterion used by the network device to determine whether the service density is satisfied may be a handover criterion that may be used as described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6. The specific judgment basis is the same, and details are not described again. Alternatively, the handover criterion here may be different from the handover criterion in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
需要说明的是,对于图7所示的实施例中由网络设备判断终端设备的指示信息的类型需要切换时,通过S101所生成的切换命令的形式,与图6所示的实施例中由网络设备接收到终端设备发送的切换请求后通过S101所生成的切换命令的形式,两种切换命令的形式可以相同或者不相同。It should be noted that when the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 determines that the type of instruction information of the terminal device needs to be switched, the form of the switching command generated by S101 is the same as that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 by the network. After the device receives the handover request sent by the terminal device, it uses the form of the handover command generated by S101. The two handover command forms may be the same or different.
例如:如果在图7所示的实施例中网络设备判断终端设备的指示信息的类型需要切换时,由于终端设备并不能确定是否需要切换指示信息的类型以及如何切换指示信息的类型,因此网络设备向终端设备发送的切换命令需要包含网络设备指示的特定类型,需要终端设备根据该特定类型进行指示信息类型的切换。For example, if the network device determines that the type of instruction information of the terminal device needs to be switched in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, because the terminal device cannot determine whether the type of instruction information needs to be switched and how to switch the type of instruction information, the network device The switching command sent to the terminal device needs to include a specific type indicated by the network device, and the terminal device needs to switch the type of the instruction information according to the specific type.
又例如:在图6所示的实施例中,由终端设备判断需要切换指示信息的类型时,向网络设备发送切换请求,网络设备根据切换请求判断终端设备是否可以进行切换。因此,虽然终端设备经过S201的判断已经确定了其指示信息需要切换,但还是需要发送切换请求让网络设备判断该终端设备的指示信息是否可以切换。网络设备如果判断该终端设备的指示信息可切换,则生成切换命令并向终端设备发送。这时切换命令中既可以不包含指示信息的类型又可以包含指示信息的类型。其中,在图6的实施例中,当切换命令不包含指示信息的类型时,终端设备收到该切换命令后根据切换命令就能够确定指示信息的类型可以切换为该终端设备在S201中所确定的指示信息的类型;或者终端设备收到切换命令后,根据该切换命令、目前监测的指示信息的类型以及切换关系三种因素共同确定需要切换的指示信息的类型,其中,所述切换关系同样可以是终端设备提前配置并存储在终端设备中、或者切换关系也可以在切换命令中携带由网络设备实时发送给终端设备。而在图6的实施例中,当切换命令包含指示信息的类型时,切换命令中指示信息的类型又可以与终端设备请求的类型相同或不同,终端设备收到该切换命令后,根据切换命令中的指示信息的类型进行切换。上述实施例中的切换命令的形式为示例,本申请对切换命令的具体形式并不限定。For another example: in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, when the terminal device determines that the type of handover instruction information is required, it sends a handover request to the network device, and the network device determines whether the terminal device can perform handover according to the handover request. Therefore, although the terminal device has determined that its instruction information needs to be switched after the judgment of S201, it is still necessary to send a handover request for the network device to determine whether the instruction information of the terminal device can be switched. If the network device determines that the instruction information of the terminal device is switchable, it generates a switching command and sends it to the terminal device. At this time, the switching command may not include the type of the instruction information or the type of the instruction information. Wherein, in the embodiment of FIG. 6, when the switching command does not contain the type of the indication information, the terminal device can determine the type of the indication information according to the switching command after receiving the switching command, and the type of the indication information can be switched to that determined by the terminal device in S201. After receiving the handover command, the terminal device determines the type of the instruction information that needs to be handed over according to the handover command, the type of the currently monitored instruction information, and the handover relationship. The handover relationship is the same. The terminal device may be configured in advance and stored in the terminal device, or the handover relationship may be carried in the handover command and sent by the network device to the terminal device in real time. In the embodiment of FIG. 6, when the switching command includes the type of the indication information, the type of the indication information in the switching command may be the same as or different from the type requested by the terminal device. After the terminal device receives the switching command, it Switch the type of instruction information in. The form of the handover command in the above embodiment is an example, and the specific form of the handover command is not limited in this application.
综上,本实施例提供的指示信息通信方法中,能够由网络设备或者终端设备根据二者间的业务密度对是否切换指示信息的类型进行判断,若根据判断准则确定需要进行指示信息类型的判断,则网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,使得终端设备完成指示信息类型的切换,从而能够在满足指示信息的切换条件时,根据网络设备向终端设备发送的切换命令,使得网络设备和终端设备二者之间使用不同类型的指示信息进行通信,从而满足终端设备不同的使用场景和业务的动态变化,提高终端的指示信息的切换灵活性,进一步降低终端设备的功耗和通信开销。In summary, in the instruction information communication method provided in this embodiment, a network device or a terminal device can determine whether to switch the type of instruction information according to the service density between the two. If it is determined according to the judgment criterion that the type of instruction information needs to be judged , The network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, so that the terminal device completes the switching of the instruction information type, so that when the switching condition of the instruction information is satisfied, the network device and the terminal device can be switched according to the switching command sent by the network device to the terminal device. The users use different types of instruction information for communication, so as to meet different usage scenarios and dynamic changes of services of the terminal device, improve the switching flexibility of the terminal instruction information, and further reduce the power consumption and communication overhead of the terminal device.
图8为本申请终端设备一实施例的结构示意图。如图8示出了本实施例提供的终端设备,该终端设备可以是前述实施例中任一项的终端设备。终端设备800包括:FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device of the present application. FIG. 8 shows a terminal device provided in this embodiment, and the terminal device may be a terminal device in any of the foregoing embodiments. The terminal device 800 includes:
收发模块801,用于接收来自网络设备的切换命令;其中,切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The transceiver module 801 is configured to receive a switching command from a network device; wherein the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type;
处理模块820,用于根据切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息;A processing module 820, configured to determine the second type of configuration information according to the switching command;
处理模块820还用于,根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。The processing module 820 is further configured to monitor the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
本实施例提供的终端设备可执行如图5所示的指示信息通信方法,其实现方式与 原理相同,不再赘述。The terminal device provided in this embodiment can execute the instruction information communication method shown in FIG. 5. The implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
可选地,在上述实施例中,指示信息的类型至少包括:休眠信号GTS和唤醒信号WUS。Optionally, in the foregoing embodiment, the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
可选地,在上述实施例中,处理模块820具体用于,根据切换命令和映射关系确定至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上的第二类型的配置信息;处理模块820具体用于,根据第二类型的配置信息在至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上监测第二类型的指示信息。Optionally, in the above embodiment, the processing module 820 is specifically configured to determine at least one activated CC or the second type of configuration information on at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship; the processing module 820 is specifically configured to , Monitoring the second type of indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
可选地,在上述实施例中,切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;Optionally, in the above embodiment, the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; at least one parameter is used to indicate existence Switching the type of the indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP of the mapping relationship from a first type to a second type;
当存在一个载波且一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,映射关系包括:至少一个参数与至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中每个参数与至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中多个参数与至少一个激活的BWP中多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is one carrier and one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP; or, each parameter of at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP Correspondence between multiple activated BWPs; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in at least one activated BWP;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,映射关系包括:至少一个参数与多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中多个参数与多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs; or each parameter of at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated CCs; or correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs in multiple activated CCs;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,映射关系包括:至少一个参数与多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中的多个参数与多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: at least one parameter corresponds to each activated BWP that each activated CC has in each of the multiple activated CCs A relationship between each parameter of at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs of one or more activated CCs of the plurality of activated CCs; or, a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs Correspondence of one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs among the activated CCs.
可选地,若处理模块820判断终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,收发模块810向网络设备发送切换请求;其中,切换请求用于向网络设备请求切换指示信息的类型。Optionally, if the processing module 820 determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion, the transceiver module 810 sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used to request the type of the handover instruction information from the network device.
可选地,在上述实施例中,切换准则包括:若第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;若第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。Optionally, in the above embodiment, the handover criterion includes: if the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold; if the first type of power The saving signal is WUS, and the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than the second preset threshold.
可选地,在上述实施例中,Optionally, in the foregoing embodiment,
切换命令包括:第二类型的指示信息;或者,The switching command includes: second type of indication information; or,
切换命令包括:指示信息的类型切换指示;则处理模块820具体用于,根据类型切换命令、第一类型的指示信息和切换关系确定第二类型的配置信息;其中,切换关系包括指示信息的各种类型之间的转换关系。The switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the instruction information; the processing module 820 is specifically configured to determine the second type of configuration information according to the type switching command, the first type of instruction information, and the switching relationship; wherein the switching relationship includes each of the instruction information The conversion relationship between types.
可选地,在上述实施例中,处理模块820具体用于,若判断终端设备监测第一类型的指示信息与第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路不同,则将用于监测第一类型的指示信息的检测电路切换为用于监测第二类型的指示信息的监测电路;和/或,若判断终端设备监测第一类型的指示信息与第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测位置不同, 则将第一类型的指示信息的监测位置切换为第二类型的指示信息的监测位置。Optionally, in the above embodiment, the processing module 820 is specifically configured to, if it is determined that the monitoring circuit used by the terminal device to monitor the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information are different, it will be used to monitor the first type The detection circuit of the instruction information is switched to a monitoring circuit for monitoring the second type of instruction information; and / or, if it is determined that the monitoring location used by the terminal device to monitor the first type of instruction information and the second type of instruction information is different, Then, the monitoring position of the first type of instruction information is switched to the monitoring position of the second type of instruction information.
上述各实施例提供的终端设备可用于前述实施例中对应的指示信息通信方法,实现方式与原理相同,不再赘述。The terminal devices provided in the foregoing embodiments may be used in the corresponding indication information communication method in the foregoing embodiments, and the implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
图9为本申请终端设备一实施例的结构示意图。如图9所示,本实施例提供的终端设备包括:收发器910,处理器920和存储器930。其中,存储器930中存储指令或程序,处理器920用于执行存储器930中存储的指令或程序。存储器930中存储的指令或程序被执行时,该处理器920用于执行上述实施例中处理模块820执行的操作,收发器910用于执行上述实施例中收发模块810执行的操作。FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal device of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the terminal device provided in this embodiment includes a transceiver 910, a processor 920, and a memory 930. The memory 930 stores instructions or programs, and the processor 920 is configured to execute the instructions or programs stored in the memory 930. When instructions or programs stored in the memory 930 are executed, the processor 920 is configured to perform the operations performed by the processing module 820 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 910 is configured to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 810 in the foregoing embodiment.
应理解,根据本发明实施例的终端设备800或终端设备900可对应于本发明前述各实施例的指示信息通信方法中的终端设备,并且终端设备800或终端设备900中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5至图7中的各个方法的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the terminal device 800 or the terminal device 900 according to the embodiment of the present invention may correspond to the terminal device in the instruction information communication method of the foregoing embodiments of the present invention, and the operations and operations of each module in the terminal device 800 or the terminal device 900 The / or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the methods in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, and are not repeated here for brevity.
图10为本申请网络设备一实施例的结构示意图。如图10示出了本实施例提供的网络设备,该网络设备可以是前述实施例中任一项的网络设备。网络设备1000包括:收发模块1010和处理模块1020。其中,处理模块1020用于生成切换命令;其中,切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;收发模块1010用于向终端设备发送切换命令;以使终端设备根据切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,并根据第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application. FIG. 10 shows a network device provided in this embodiment, and the network device may be the network device in any one of the foregoing embodiments. The network device 1000 includes a transceiver module 1010 and a processing module 1020. The processing module 1020 is configured to generate a switching command; the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type; the transceiver module 1010 is used to send a switching command to the terminal device; The command determines the configuration information of the second type, and monitors the indication information of the second type according to the configuration information of the second type.
本实施例提供的网络设备可执行如图5所示的指示信息通信方法,其实现方式与原理相同,不再赘述。The network device provided in this embodiment can execute the instruction information communication method shown in FIG. 5. The implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
可选地,在上述实施例中,指示信息的类型至少包括:休眠信号GTS和唤醒信号WUS。Optionally, in the foregoing embodiment, the type of the indication information includes at least: a sleep signal GTS and a wake-up signal WUS.
可选地,在上述实施例中,切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;Optionally, in the above embodiment, the handover command includes: at least one parameter; wherein at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; at least one parameter is used to indicate existence Switching the type of the indication information on at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP of the mapping relationship from a first type to a second type;
当存在一个载波且一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,映射关系包括:至少一个参数与至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中每个参数与至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中多个参数与至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is one carrier and one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP; or, each parameter of at least one parameter and at least one activated BWP Correspondence between multiple activated BWPs; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in at least one activated BWP;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,映射关系包括:至少一个参数与多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中多个参数与多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs; or each parameter of at least one parameter and multiple Correspondence between activated CCs; or correspondence between multiple parameters in at least one parameter and multiple activated CCs in multiple activated CCs;
当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,映射关系包括:至少一个参数与多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,至少一个参数中的多个参数与多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: at least one parameter corresponds to each activated BWP that each activated CC has in each of the multiple activated CCs A relationship between each parameter of at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs of one or more activated CCs of the plurality of activated CCs; or, a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs Correspondence of one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs among the activated CCs.
可选地,在上述实施例中,收发模块1010还用于,接收来自终端设备的切换请求;其中,切换请求用于终端设备向网络设备请求切换指示信息的类型。Optionally, in the above embodiment, the transceiver module 1010 is further configured to receive a handover request from the terminal device; wherein the handover request is used for the terminal device to request the type of the handover instruction information from the network device.
可选地,在上述实施例中,处理模块1020具体用于,若判断终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,生成切换命令。Optionally, in the foregoing embodiment, the processing module 1020 is specifically configured to generate a handover command if it is determined that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets the handover criterion.
可选地,在上述实施例中,切换准则包括:若第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;若第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,终端设备和网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。Optionally, in the above embodiment, the handover criterion includes: if the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold; if the first type of power The saving signal is WUS, and the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than the second preset threshold.
可选地,在上述实施例中,处理模块1020具体用于,判断终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换,生成切换命令;处理模块1020具体用于,Optionally, in the foregoing embodiment, the processing module 1020 is specifically configured to determine that the type of the instruction information of the terminal device can be switched and generate a switching command; the processing module 1020 is specifically configured to:
根据来自终端设备的切换命令判断终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换;Judging the type of the instruction information of the terminal device according to the switching command from the terminal device;
或者,根据来自终端设备所在小区内所有终端设备发送的切换请求的数量大于预设阈值,判断终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换。Alternatively, according to the number of handover requests sent from all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located is greater than a preset threshold, the type of the indication information of the terminal device may be switched.
可选地,在上述实施例中,切换命令包括:第二类型的指示信息;或者,切换命令包括:指示信息的类型切换指示。Optionally, in the above embodiment, the switching command includes: a second type of indication information; or, the switching command includes: a type switching indication of the indication information.
上述各实施例提供的网络设备可用于前述实施例中对应的指示信息通信方法,实现方式与原理相同,不再赘述。The network devices provided in the foregoing embodiments may be used for the corresponding indication information communication method in the foregoing embodiments, and the implementation manner is the same as the principle, and details are not described again.
图11为本申请网络设备一实施例的结构示意图。如图11所示,本实施例提供的终端设备包括:收发器1110,处理器1120和存储器1130。其中,存储器1130中存储指令或程序,处理器1120用于执行存储器1130中存储的指令或程序。存储器1130中存储的指令或程序被执行时,该处理器1120用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1020执行的操作,收发器1110用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1010执行的操作。FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a network device according to the present application. As shown in FIG. 11, the terminal device provided in this embodiment includes a transceiver 1110, a processor 1120, and a memory 1130. The memory 1130 stores instructions or programs, and the processor 1120 is configured to execute the instructions or programs stored in the memory 1130. When the instructions or programs stored in the memory 1130 are executed, the processor 1120 is configured to perform the operations performed by the processing module 1020 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 1110 is configured to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1010 in the foregoing embodiment.
应理解,根据本发明实施例的终端设备1000或终端设备1100可对应于本发明前述各实施例的指示信息通信方法中的终端设备,并且终端设备1000或终端设备1100中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5至图7中的各个方法的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the terminal device 1000 or the terminal device 1100 according to the embodiment of the present invention may correspond to the terminal device in the instruction information communication method of the foregoing embodiments of the present invention, and the operations of various modules in the terminal device 1000 or the terminal device 1100 and The / or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the methods in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, and are not repeated here for brevity.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电路。该通信装置可用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a circuit. The communication device may be configured to perform an action performed by a terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
当该通信装置为终端设备时,图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。图12示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图12中,终端设备以手机作为例子。如图12所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。When the communication device is a terminal device, FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate. In FIG. 12, the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example. As shown in FIG. 12, the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device. The processor is mainly used for processing communication protocols and communication data, controlling terminal devices, executing software programs, and processing data of the software programs. The memory is mainly used for storing software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals. The antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input / output devices, such as a touch screen, a display screen, and a keyboard, are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have an input / output device.
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信 号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图12中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves. When data is sent to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor. The processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. For ease of explanation, only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 12. In an actual terminal equipment product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device. The memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图12所示,终端设备包括收发单元1210和处理单元1220。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1210中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1210中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1210包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。In the embodiments of the present application, an antenna and a radio frequency circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as a transmitting and receiving unit of a terminal device, and a processor having a processing function may be regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 12, the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like. The processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing single board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 1210 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1210 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. The transceiver unit may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit. The receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit. The transmitting unit may also be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
应理解,收发单元1210用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理单元1220用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。It should be understood that the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform the sending operation and the reception operation on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment, and the processing unit 1220 is configured to perform operations other than the transceiver operation on the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
例如,在一种实现方式中,收发单元1210用于执行图5中的S102中终端侧设备的接收操作,和/或收发单元1210还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他收发步骤。处理单元1220,用于执行图5中的S103与S104,和/或处理单元1220还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他处理步骤。For example, in one implementation manner, the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform a receiving operation of the terminal-side device in S102 in FIG. 5, and / or the transceiver unit 1210 is further configured to perform other transceiver steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application. . The processing unit 1220 is configured to execute S103 and S104 in FIG. 5, and / or the processing unit 1220 is further configured to execute other processing steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
再例如,在另一种实现方式中,收发单元1210用于执行图6中S202的发送操作与S102的接收操作,和/或收发单元1210还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他收发步骤。处理单元1220,用于执行图5中的S201、S103与S104,和/或处理单元1220还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他处理步骤。For another example, in another implementation manner, the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform the sending operation of S202 and the receiving operation of S102 in FIG. 6, and / or the transceiver unit 1210 is further configured to perform other operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application Send and receive steps. The processing unit 1220 is configured to execute S201, S103, and S104 in FIG. 5, and / or the processing unit 1220 is also used to execute other processing steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
又例如,在再一种实现方式中,收发单元1210用于执行图7中的S102中终端侧设备的接收操作,和/或收发单元1210还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他收发步骤。处理单元1220,用于执行图7中的S103与S104,和/或处理单元1220还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他处理步骤。For another example, in yet another implementation manner, the transceiver unit 1210 is configured to perform a receiving operation of the terminal-side device in S102 in FIG. 7, and / or the transceiver unit 1210 is further configured to perform other operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application. Send and receive steps. The processing unit 1220 is configured to execute S103 and S104 in FIG. 7, and / or the processing unit 1220 is further configured to execute other processing steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment of the present application.
当该通信装置为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。When the communication device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit. The transceiver unit may be an input / output circuit or a communication interface; the processing unit is a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时,可以参照图13所示的设备。图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图。作为一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图9中处理器920的功能。在图13中,该设备包括处理器1310,发送数据处理器1320,接收数据处理器1330。上述实施例中的处理模块810可以是图13中的该处理器1310,并完成相应的功能。上述实施例中的收发模块820可以是图13中的发送数据处理器1320,和/或接收数据处理器1330。虽然图13中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器,但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明,仅是示意性的。When the communication device in this embodiment is a terminal device, reference may be made to the device shown in FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application. As an example, the device may perform functions similar to the processor 920 in FIG. 9. In FIG. 13, the device includes a processor 1310, a transmitting data processor 1320, and a receiving data processor 1330. The processing module 810 in the above embodiment may be the processor 1310 in FIG. 13 and perform corresponding functions. The transceiver module 820 in the above embodiment may be the sending data processor 1320 and / or the receiving data processor 1330 in FIG. 13. Although a channel encoder and a channel decoder are shown in FIG. 13, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, but are only schematic.
图14示出本实施例的另一种形式,图14为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图。如图14所示,处理装置1400中包括调制子系统、中央处理子系统、周边子系统等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子系统。具体的,该调制子系统可以包括处理器1403,接口1404。其中处理器1403完成上述处理模块820的功能,接口1304完成上述收发模块810的功能。作为另一种变形,该调制子系统包括存储器1406、处理器1403及存储在存储器1406上并可在处理器上运行的程序,该处理器1403执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是,所述存储器1406可以是非易失性的,也可以是易失性的,其位置可以位于调制子系统内部,也可以位于处理装置1400中,只要该存储器1406可以连接到所述处理器1403即可。FIG. 14 shows another form of this embodiment, and FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 14, the processing device 1400 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem. The communication device in this embodiment may serve as a modulation subsystem therein. Specifically, the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1403 and an interface 1404. The processor 1403 performs the functions of the processing module 820, and the interface 1304 performs the functions of the transceiver module 810. As another modification, the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1406, a processor 1403, and a program stored on the memory 1406 and executable on the processor. When the processor 1403 executes the program, the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is implemented. Methods. It should be noted that the memory 1406 may be non-volatile or volatile, and its location may be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1400, as long as the memory 1406 can be connected to the memory 1406. The processor 1403 is sufficient.
作为本实施例的另一种形式,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有指令,该指令被执行时执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。As another form of this embodiment, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, which stores instructions thereon, and when the instructions are executed, the method on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is executed.
作为本实施例的另一种形式,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,该指令被执行时执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。As another form of this embodiment, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, and when the instructions are executed, the method on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is executed.
应理解,本发明实施例中提及的处理器可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU),还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that the processor mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and application-specific integrated circuits (DSPs). Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), off-the-shelf Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
还应理解,本发明实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present invention may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), and an electronic memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example, but not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM), Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM ) And direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM).
需要说明的是,当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时,存储器(存储模块)集成在处理器中。It should be noted that when the processor is a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA, or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, the memory (memory module) is integrated in the processor.
应注意,本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It should be noted that the memory described herein is intended to include, but is not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
还应理解,本文中涉及的第一、第二、第三、第四以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的范围。It should also be understood that the first, second, third, fourth and various numerical numbers referred to herein are only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the application.
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以 存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the term “and / or” in this document is only an association relationship describing an associated object, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and / or B can mean: A exists alone, and A and B exist simultaneously. There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本发明实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not deal with the embodiments of the invention The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices, and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and are not repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disks, mobile hard disks, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks or compact discs, and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application. It should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种指示信息通信方法,其特征在于,包括:An indication information communication method, comprising:
    终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令;其中,所述切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The terminal device receives a handover command from the network device; wherein the handover command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type;
    所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息;Determining, by the terminal device, configuration information of a second type according to the switching command;
    所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。The terminal device monitors the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 1, wherein:
    所述终端根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,包括:The determining, according to the switching command, the second type of configuration information includes:
    所述终端设备根据所述切换命令和所述映射关系确定所述至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上的第二类型的配置信息;Determining, by the terminal device, the second type of configuration information on the at least one activated CC or the at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship;
    所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息,包括:The monitoring, by the terminal device according to the configuration information of the second type, the indication information of the second type includes:
    所述终端设备根据所述第二类型的配置信息在所述至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上监测第二类型的指示信息。The terminal device monitors the second type of indication information on the at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 2, wherein:
    所述切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,所述至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;所述至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The switching command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; the at least one parameter is used to indicate that at least one mapping relationship exists The type of the indication information on an activated CC or at least one activated BWP is switched from the first type to the second type;
    当存在一个载波且所述一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is a carrier and the one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and the plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中的多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令之前,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein before the terminal device receives a handover command from a network device, further comprising:
    若所述终端设备判断所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送切换请求;其中,所述切换请求用于向所述网络设备请求切换所述指示信息的类型。If the terminal device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device satisfies a handover criterion, the terminal device sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used for the network device Request to switch the type of the indication information.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换准则包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the handover criterion comprises:
    若所述第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的 业务密度低于第一预设阈值;If the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
    若所述第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。If the first type of power saving signal is WUS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein:
    所述切换命令包括:所述第二类型的指示信息;The switching command includes: the second type of indication information;
    或者,or,
    所述切换命令包括:所述指示信息的类型切换指示;The switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the indication information;
    则所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息包括:所述终端设备根据所述类型切换命令、所述第一类型的指示信息和切换关系确定所述第二类型的配置信息;其中,所述切换关系包括所述指示信息的各种类型之间的转换关系。The terminal device determining the second type of configuration information according to the switching command includes: the terminal device determining the second type of configuration information according to the type switching command, the first type of indication information, and a switching relationship. ; Wherein the switching relationship includes a conversion relationship between various types of the indication information.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the determining, by the terminal device according to the switching command, the second type of configuration information comprises:
    若所述终端设备判断所述终端设备监测所述第一类型的指示信息与所述第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路不同,则所述终端设备将用于监测所述第一类型的指示信息的检测电路切换为用于监测所述第二类型的指示信息的监测电路;和/或,If the terminal device judges that the terminal device monitors the first type of instruction information and the monitoring circuit used by the second type of instruction information is different, the terminal device will be used to monitor the first type of information. The detection circuit of the instruction information is switched to a monitoring circuit for monitoring the second type of instruction information; and / or,
    若所述终端设备判断所述终端设备监测所述第一类型的指示信息与所述第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测位置不同,则所述终端设备将所述第一类型的指示信息的监测位置切换为所述第二类型的指示信息的监测位置。If the terminal device determines that the monitoring location used by the terminal device to monitor the first type of instruction information is different from the monitoring location used by the second type of instruction information, the terminal device changes the The monitoring position is switched to the monitoring position of the second type of indication information.
  8. 一种指示信息通信方法,其特征在于,包括:An indication information communication method, comprising:
    网络设备生成切换命令;其中,所述切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The network device generates a handover command; wherein the handover command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type;
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述切换命令;以使所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,并根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。The network device sends the handover command to the terminal device; so that the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the handover command, and monitors the second type of indication according to the second type of configuration information information.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 8, wherein:
    所述切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,所述至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;所述至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The switching command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; the at least one parameter is used to indicate that at least one mapping relationship exists The type of the indication information on an activated CC or at least one activated BWP is switched from the first type to the second type;
    当存在一个载波且所述一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is a carrier and the one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP ;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中所述多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and a plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and the plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括: 所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中的多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation that each activated CC in the multiple activated CCs has A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备生成切换命令之前,还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein before the network device generates a handover command, the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备接收来自终端设备的切换请求;其中,所述切换请求用于所述终端设备向所述网络设备请求切换所述指示信息的类型。The network device receives a handover request from a terminal device; wherein the handover request is used by the terminal device to request the network device to switch the type of the indication information.
  11. 根据权利要求8-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备生成切换命令,包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein the network device generating a handover command comprises:
    若所述网络设备判断所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,所述网络设备生成所述切换命令。If the network device determines that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets a handover criterion, the network device generates the handover command.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换准则包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the handover criterion comprises:
    若所述第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;If the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
    若所述第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。If the first type of power saving signal is WUS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备生成切换命令,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein generating a handover command by the network device comprises:
    所述网络设备判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换,所述网络设备生成所述切换命令;The network device determines that the type of the indication information of the terminal device can be switched, and the network device generates the switching command;
    所述网络设备判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换,包括:The network device determining that the type of instruction information of the terminal device can be switched includes:
    所述网络设备根据来自所述终端设备的所述切换请求,判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换;Determining, by the network device according to the switching request from the terminal device, that the type of instruction information of the terminal device can be switched;
    或者,所述网络设备根据来自所述终端设备所在小区内所有终端设备发送的切换请求的数量大于预设阈值,判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换。Alternatively, the network device determines that the type of the indication information of the terminal device can be switched according to the number of handover requests sent from all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located is greater than a preset threshold.
  14. 根据权利要求8-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 8-13, wherein:
    所述切换命令包括:第二类型的指示信息;The switching command includes: second type of indication information;
    或者,所述切换命令包括:所述指示信息的类型切换指示。Alternatively, the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the indication information.
  15. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    收发模块,用于接收来自网络设备的切换命令;其中,所述切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;A transceiver module, configured to receive a switching command from a network device; wherein the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type;
    处理模块,用于根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息;A processing module, configured to determine the second type of configuration information according to the switching command;
    所述处理模块还用于,根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。The processing module is further configured to monitor the second type of indication information according to the second type of configuration information.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to claim 15, wherein:
    所述处理模块具体用于,根据所述切换命令和所述映射关系确定所述至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上的第二类型的配置信息;The processing module is specifically configured to determine the second type of configuration information on the at least one activated CC or the at least one activated BWP according to the switching command and the mapping relationship;
    所述处理模块具体用于,根据所述第二类型的配置信息在所述至少一个激活的CC 或者至少一个激活的BWP上监测第二类型的指示信息。The processing module is specifically configured to monitor the second type of indication information on the at least one activated CC or at least one activated BWP according to the second type of configuration information.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to claim 16, wherein:
    所述切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,所述至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;所述至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The switching command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; the at least one parameter is used to indicate that at least one mapping relationship exists The type of the indication information on an activated CC or at least one activated BWP is switched from the first type to the second type;
    当存在一个载波且所述一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is a carrier and the one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and the plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中的多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
  18. 根据权利要求15-17任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to any one of claims 15 to 17, wherein
    若所述处理模块判断所述通信装置和所述网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,所述收发模块向所述网络设备发送切换请求;其中,所述切换请求用于向所述网络设备请求切换所述指示信息的类型。If the processing module determines that the service density between the communication device and the network device satisfies a handover criterion, the transceiver module sends a handover request to the network device; wherein the handover request is used for the network device Request to switch the type of the indication information.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述切换准则包括:The communication device according to claim 18, wherein the handover criterion comprises:
    若所述第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,所述通信装置和所述网络设备之间的业务密度低于第一预设阈值;If the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the communication device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
    若所述第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,所述通信装置和所述网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。If the first type of power saving signal is WUS, the service density between the communication device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  20. 根据权利要求15-19任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,The communication device according to any one of claims 15 to 19, wherein
    所述切换命令包括:所述第二类型的指示信息;The switching command includes: the second type of indication information;
    或者,or,
    所述切换命令包括:所述指示信息的类型切换指示;则所述处理模块具体用于,根据所述类型切换命令、所述第一类型的指示信息和切换关系确定所述第二类型的配置信息;其中,所述切换关系包括所述指示信息的各种类型之间的转换关系。The switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the instruction information; and the processing module is specifically configured to determine the configuration of the second type according to the type switching command, the first type of instruction information, and a switching relationship. Information; wherein the switching relationship includes a conversion relationship between various types of the indication information.
  21. 根据权利要求15-20任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块具体用于,The communication device according to any one of claims 15-20, wherein the processing module is specifically configured to:
    若判断所述通信装置监测所述第一类型的指示信息与所述第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测电路不同,则将用于监测所述第一类型的指示信息的检测电路切换为用于 监测所述第二类型的指示信息的监测电路;和/或,If it is determined that the monitoring device that the communication device uses to monitor the first type of instruction information is different from the monitoring circuit used for the second type of instruction information, the detection circuit for monitoring the first type of instruction information is switched to use A monitoring circuit for monitoring the second type of instruction information; and / or,
    若判断所述通信装置监测所述第一类型的指示信息与所述第二类型的指示信息所使用的监测位置不同,则将所述第一类型的指示信息的监测位置切换为所述第二类型的指示信息的监测位置。If it is determined that the monitoring position used by the communication device to monitor the first type of instruction information is different from the monitoring position used by the second type of instruction information, switching the monitoring position of the first type of instruction information to the second The type indicates the monitoring location.
  22. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, comprising:
    处理模块,用于生成切换命令;其中,所述切换命令用于将指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;A processing module for generating a switching command; wherein the switching command is used to switch the type of the indication information from the first type to the second type;
    收发模块,用于向所述终端设备发送所述切换命令;以使所述终端设备根据所述切换命令确定第二类型的配置信息,并根据所述第二类型的配置信息监测第二类型的指示信息。A transceiver module, configured to send the switching command to the terminal device, so that the terminal device determines the second type of configuration information according to the switching command, and monitors the second type of configuration information according to the second type of configuration information. Instructions.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的网络设备,其特征在于,The network device according to claim 22, wherein:
    所述切换命令包括:至少一个参数;其中,所述至少一个参数与至少一个激活的分量载波CC或者至少一个激活的带宽部分BWP存在映射关系;所述至少一个参数用于指示存在映射关系的至少一个激活的CC或者至少一个激活的BWP上指示信息的类型从第一类型切换为第二类型;The switching command includes: at least one parameter; wherein the at least one parameter has a mapping relationship with at least one activated component carrier CC or at least one activated bandwidth part BWP; the at least one parameter is used to indicate that at least one mapping relationship exists The type of the indication information on an activated CC or at least one activated BWP is switched from the first type to the second type;
    当存在一个载波且所述一个载波具有至少一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述至少一个激活的BWP中的多个激活的BWP的对应关系;When there is a carrier and the one carrier has at least one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the at least one activated BWP; or each of the at least one parameter Correspondence between multiple parameters and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP; or, correspondence between multiple parameters in the at least one parameter and multiple activated BWPs in the at least one activated BWP ;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有一个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中多个激活的CC的对应关系;When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has one activated BWP, the mapping relationship includes: a one-to-one correspondence between the at least one parameter and the multiple activated CCs; or the at least one A correspondence between each parameter in the parameters and the plurality of activated CCs; or, a correspondence between a plurality of parameters in the at least one parameter and a plurality of activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs;
    当存在多个激活的CC且每个激活的CC具有多个激活的BWP,所述映射关系包括:所述至少一个参数与所述多个激活的CC中每个激活的CC具有的每个激活的BWP的一一对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中每个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系;或者,所述至少一个参数中的多个参数与所述多个激活的CC中一个或多个激活的CC具有的一个或多个激活的BWP的对应关系。When there are multiple activated CCs and each activated CC has multiple activated BWPs, the mapping relationship includes: the at least one parameter and each activation of each activated CC of the multiple activated CCs A one-to-one correspondence between BWPs; or a correspondence between each parameter in the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs in one or more activated CCs in the plurality of activated CCs; or, A correspondence relationship between a plurality of parameters of the at least one parameter and one or more activated BWPs possessed by one or more activated CCs among the plurality of activated CCs.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于,The network device according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the transceiver module is further configured to:
    接收来自终端设备的切换请求;其中,所述切换请求用于所述终端设备向所述网络设备请求切换所述指示信息的类型。Receiving a handover request from a terminal device; wherein the handover request is used by the terminal device to request the network device to switch the type of the indication information.
  25. 根据权利要求22-24任一项所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述处理模块具体用于,The network device according to any one of claims 22 to 24, wherein the processing module is specifically configured to:
    若判断所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度满足切换准则,生成所述切换命令。If it is determined that the service density between the terminal device and the network device meets a handover criterion, the handover command is generated.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述切换准则包括:The network device according to claim 25, wherein the handover criterion comprises:
    若所述第一类型的指示信息为休眠信号GTS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的 业务密度低于第一预设阈值;If the first type of indication information is a sleep signal GTS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
    若所述第一类型的功率节省信号为WUS,所述终端设备和所述网络设备之间的业务密度高于第二预设阈值。If the first type of power saving signal is WUS, the service density between the terminal device and the network device is higher than a second preset threshold.
  27. 根据权利要求24所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述处理模块具体用于,The network device according to claim 24, wherein the processing module is specifically configured to:
    判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换,生成所述切换命令;Determining that the type of instruction information of the terminal device can be switched, and generating the switching command;
    所述处理模块具体用于,The processing module is specifically configured to:
    根据来自所述终端设备的所述切换请求,判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换;Determining, according to the switching request from the terminal device, that the type of instruction information of the terminal device can be switched;
    或者,根据来自所述终端设备所在小区内所有终端设备发送的切换请求的数量大于预设阈值,判断所述终端设备的指示信息的类型可进行切换。Alternatively, it is determined that the type of the indication information of the terminal device can be switched according to the number of handover requests sent from all terminal devices in the cell where the terminal device is located is greater than a preset threshold.
  28. 根据权利要求22-27任一项所述的网络设备,其特征在于,The network device according to any one of claims 22 to 27, wherein
    所述切换命令包括:第二类型的指示信息;The switching command includes: second type of indication information;
    或者,所述切换命令包括:所述指示信息的类型切换指示。Alternatively, the switching command includes: a type switching instruction of the indication information.
  29. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,其特征在于,所述程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至7中任一项所述的通信方法。A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon a computer program, characterized in that when the program is executed by a processor, the communication method according to any one of claims 1 to 7 is implemented.
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,其特征在于,所述程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求8至14中任一项所述的通信方法。A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon a computer program, characterized in that when the program is executed by a processor, the communication method according to any one of claims 8 to 14 is implemented.
  31. 一种通信装置,包括存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现权利要求1至7中任一项所述的通信方法。A communication device includes a memory, a processor, and a program stored on the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the processor implements any of claims 1 to 7 when the processor executes the program. A communication method according to one item.
  32. 一种通信装置,包括存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现权利要求8至14中任一项所述的通信方法。A communication device includes a memory, a processor, and a program stored on the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the processor implements any of claims 8 to 14 when the processor executes the program. A communication method according to one item.
  33. 一种通信系统,包括权利要求15-21之一的通信装置,和权利要求22-28之一的网络设备。A communication system includes the communication device according to any one of claims 15-21, and the network device according to any one of claims 22-28.
PCT/CN2019/106167 2018-09-30 2019-09-17 Communication method and apparatus for indication information WO2020063398A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811163196.0 2018-09-30
CN201811163196.0A CN110971376B (en) 2018-09-30 2018-09-30 Indication information communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020063398A1 true WO2020063398A1 (en) 2020-04-02

Family

ID=69950264

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/106167 WO2020063398A1 (en) 2018-09-30 2019-09-17 Communication method and apparatus for indication information

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110971376B (en)
WO (1) WO2020063398A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116095794A (en) * 2021-11-08 2023-05-09 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for waking up terminal equipment in communication network and readable storage medium
CN115529334B (en) * 2022-10-12 2023-05-16 山东省地质矿产勘查开发局第八地质大队(山东省第八地质矿产勘查院) Hydrologic prospecting water level monitoring device that possesses alarming function

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018175760A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Intel Corporation Wake up signal for machine type communication and narrowband-internet-of-things devices

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
IT1318276B1 (en) * 2000-07-28 2003-07-28 Siemens Inf & Comm Networks METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE CONTROL OF POWER IN RADIO-MOBILE SYSTEMS
CN101536465B (en) * 2006-09-27 2012-05-23 意大利电信股份公司 An apparatus and method for implementing configurable resource management policies
KR100957427B1 (en) * 2006-12-27 2010-05-11 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for handover in communication system
CN102076037B (en) * 2011-01-14 2014-11-12 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method and device for transmitting switching information

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018175760A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Intel Corporation Wake up signal for machine type communication and narrowband-internet-of-things devices

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Power Saving Signal for efeMTC", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #92 R1-1802373, 2 March 2018 (2018-03-02), XP051397898 *
INTEL CORPORATION: "Configurations of Wake-Up Signal for feNB-IoT", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #91 R1-1720046, 1 December 2017 (2017-12-01), XP051369728 *
SONY: "Wake Up Signalling for efeMTC", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #90 R1-1714576, 25 August 2017 (2017-08-25), XP051317346 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110971376A (en) 2020-04-07
CN110971376B (en) 2021-03-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020052492A1 (en) Method for monitoring physical downlink control channel, communication device, and network device
CN108702307B (en) System and method for user equipment state configuration
US11937254B2 (en) Wireless communcation method, terminal device, and network device
US20150365859A1 (en) Inhibiting the transmission of measurement reports from a ue when a ue is in an inactive mode and applies drx
WO2021063071A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2021097698A1 (en) Uplink access method, electronic device and storage medium
JP2020504498A (en) Intermittent reception method and apparatus
JP7478161B2 (en) PDCCH monitoring method and device
WO2022027488A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2020063398A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus for indication information
WO2021062775A1 (en) Paging message detection method and apparatus, and communication device
JP7457797B2 (en) Wireless communication methods, terminal devices and network devices
WO2022021131A1 (en) Initial bandwidth part (bwp) reselection method, terminal device, and network device
US20230217415A1 (en) Energy saving method, terminal device, and network device
WO2020135645A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2021087987A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2022206721A1 (en) Paging method and apparatus
US20240064856A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus, and terminal
WO2022006852A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2024066909A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
WO2024000493A1 (en) State determination method and apparatus, device, storage medium and program product
WO2024092653A1 (en) Wireless communication method, and terminal device and network device
WO2023122910A1 (en) Control method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023193758A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021163978A1 (en) Method for controlling state of secondary cell group, and terminal device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19865406

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19865406

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1